Vue normale

Il y a de nouveaux articles disponibles, cliquez pour rafraîchir la page.
À partir d’avant-hierFlux principal

New Synology CC400W Camera Revealed

Par : Rob Andrews
29 novembre 2023 à 08:59

Synology Reveal a New CC400W Compact IP Camera for Surveillance Station

Synology has revealed a new, more compact entry, into its range of surveillance cameras, the CC400W. This less industrial alternative to the bulkier metallic PoE BC500 bullet and TC500 turret-style cameras that were launched earlier in 2023 is seemingly designed for more internal building and day to day use, though seemingly still IP67 weatherproof – so it’s not limiting itself much in terms of deployment. Sporting a similar 4MP and 30FPS recording maximum to the other two cameras, this camera has a slightly larger 125 degrees of view (vs 110 degrees of the other two high/ceiling placement cams) and is more desktop stylized. Additionally, it will definitely be a camera that does not require a license for use in surveillance station (i.e removing the need to use one of your inclusive 2x Synology licenses that 99% of all Synology NAS arrive with and/or just meaning you can expand your surveillance setup without costly $35-50 surveillance station camera licenses). Let’s discuss everything we know so far.

Hardware and Software Highlights of the Synology CC400W AI IP Camera

The Synology CC400W IP camera features a 4MP resolution at 30 FPS recording and a 125° HFoV wide-angle lens, providing clear recording images. It includes integrated 2-way audio with a microphone and speaker. The camera is IP67 certified, making it resistant to dust and water, and it also meets the US NDAA/TAA Act standards for recording data security and confidentiality.

  • Key Specifications:
  • 4 MP resolution with 30 FPS recording.
  • 125-degree Horizontal Field of View (HFoV) wide-angle lens.
  • Integrated 2-way audio with a microphone and speaker.
  • Includes 1 microSD card slot.
  • IP67 certification and compliance with US NDAA/TAA Encryption/Security.
  • Does not require a License in Synology Surveillance Station
  • Capability to detect people and vehicles.
  • Intrusion detection.
  • Instant search feature for quick incident investigation.
  • References to use/suitability for Suitable for meetings and conferences.
  • Possible integration with Synology Chat and references to ‘Synology Meeting’ – TBC
Credit to 張 舒豪 , on Facebook – https://scontent.fbqh1-1.fna.fbcdn.net/v/t39.30808-6/406319299_10230546092733381_8216619821148617916_n.jpg?stp=cp6_dst-jpg&_nc_cat=102&ccb=1-7&_nc_sid=c42490&_nc_ohc=QUzMxeHdt_gAX8Ng9RU&_nc_ht=scontent.fbqh1-1.fna&oh=00_AfA_fTTqVVr1ts_p4cEriLkvSBJkA0PbXFA8fP2CMmLiZQ&oe=656BE72E

In terms of AI integration, the CC400W camera offers several functionalities. It can detect people and vehicles in its monitoring area, assisting in the identification of potential security threats. The camera’s intrusion detection feature alerts users to unauthorized access in the monitored area. Additionally, the instant search function allows users to locate specific video segments by time, subject, or event, facilitating efficient investigation of incidents. This would be the third camera that Synolgoy has rolled out, following the BC500 and TC500 PoE cameras that were launched in the first quarter of 2023. This camera, though still clearly having possible business applications, is a much more modest scaled system and although is IP67 weatherproof rated (TBC -conflicting reports)

Credit to Nhipsongkinhte.toquoc.vn – http://nhipsongkinhte.toquoc.vn/synology-va-chien-luoc-phat-trien-tai-viet-nam-20231129081801644.htm – HERE[/caption]

Synology Surveillance Station Software and Synology Cameras – Any Good?

The Synology CC400W camera is designed to work seamlessly with Synology Surveillance Station, version 9.1, offering advanced features compared to non-edge-AI-recognition and third-party cameras.

Used with Surveillance Station, the CC400W camera allows multiple camera feeds to be viewed simultaneously and offers side-by-side viewing of live and recorded footage.

Surveillance Station also supports privacy masks, watermarks, and integration with mapping services like Google Maps.

Beyond camera support, Surveillance Station controls IP speakers and other peripherals, accessible via mobile app or as an additional camera feed with Synology Live Cam. It offers alerts, push notifications, and analytical reports.

Additional add-ons include YouTube Live Streaming, video integrity tools, and IFTTT/Webhook services.

Key features include motion detection, missing object detection, and area tagging. Access is available through web, desktop, and mobile clients.

Smart Lapse creation condenses lengthy recordings, and cloud recording is available with Synology C2 Surveillance.

Home Mode automates camera schedules based on user presence.

The CC400W camera supports AI detection techniques like people, vehicle, and intrusion detection, and Smart Search for specific incidents.

Vehicle detection alerts for unexpected entries during off hours.

Advanced intrusion detection marks specific areas off-limits.

Crowd and loitering detection trigger alerts based on predefined criteria.

Smart Search focuses on specific areas within recorded feeds.

The CC400W camera, while advanced, does not support database storage for specific people or faces. For more advanced functionality, systems like Synology DVA1622 2-Bay or DVA3221 4 Bay are required.

Recordings are securely encrypted, and the camera is NDAA and TAA compliant. Despite limitations, the CC400W Camera’s unique features make it a valuable choice.

Which AI Services Are Included with the Synology CC400W, BC500 and TC500 Cameras (and which ones are not)?

Now, despite the Synology newer CC400W and older BC500 and TC500 Surveillance Cameras arriving with onboard hardware for AI-powered recognition tasks, it is worth highlighting that using them is NOT the same as using the Deep Video Analysis (DVA) series of NAS servers in Synology’s portfolio. These operations are managed from inside the camera and the alerts are handled and actioned by the NAS after the camera sends the appropriate alert – and these cameras so NOT have the same level of hardware as the DVA1622 and DVA3221 inside each of them! Additionally, whereas the DVA series manages multiple tasks internally from multiple cameras, only using the camera hardware as a life ‘feed’, these cameras cannot run deeper AI tasks that involve counting, internal database management and keeping records of AI referral data internally – they do not have the storage or processing power for that. So more complex people counting and specific facial recognition will not be immediately available to your PLUS series Diskstation, just because you are using the CC400W/BC500/TC500. Here is a breakdown of the services available to users with either Synology Cameras or a Synology DVA NAS:

AI Service Case Use CC400W / BC500 / TC500

DVA1622 & DVA3221

People / Vehicle/Loitering Detection Reduce false alarm and protect against loitering YES YES
Crowd Detection Monitor public safety or quality of service YES YES
Intrusion Detection Protect perimeter and restricted area YES YES
Instant Search Investigate incidents quickly after they happen YES NO
People/Vehicle Counting Calculate occupancy in shops, food courts, or parking lots with aggregated counting of people and vehicles entering and leaving NO YES
Face Recognition Automate personnel identification and prevent unauthorized access NO YES
License Plate Recognition Identify license plates and set up triggers based on configurable allow or block lists NO YES

If you are unaware of the Synology Deep Video Analysis NAS system, you can find out more about it in the video reviews of the hardware and software below from our YouTube channel:

When will the Synology CC400W Camera Be Released and the Price?

Synology did not give a particularly large amount of information on the commercial release of the WCC400W Camera at the time of writing, but the few indications online all seem to indicate ‘H1 2024’, so that means within the first three months of 2024. Not a particularly concise release window, but still – not hugely far away in the overall scheme of things. Expect pricing to be confirmed alongside bundle deals at launch.

What do you think of the Synology CC400W? Let us know below in the comments below. We pool the comments on this article and the videos that are featured in it to keep all the relevant comments in one place, so take a look and see if your POV is the same as everyone else’s.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

QNAP TVS-h874T Thunderbolt4 NAS Review – Editing Perfection?

Par : Rob Andrews
8 décembre 2023 à 15:00

The QNAP TVS-h874T NAS Drive Review

The unveiling of the TVS-H874T at Computex in summer 2023 marked an important update to the existing TVS-h874 model. This system, positioned in the higher end of the market with a launch price between $2999 and $3499, caters to a niche yet demanding audience. Aimed at content creators, 4K video editors, and those involved in production, the TVS-H874T is designed to meet the intensive demands of high-resolution content management and creation. As the fourth, or by some measures, the fifth generation of Thunderbolt NAS technology, the TVS-H874T raises important considerations for potential users. It represents a significant investment in network storage technology, particularly for professionals who need high-capacity and high-speed storage solutions. This launch prompts several critical questions: Will the TVS-H874T truly benefit content creators and post-production users who are considering it? Does it justify its high price tag in comparison to the capabilities it offers? And, in the evolving landscape of digital storage, are users better off investing in this advanced NAS system, or might traditional Thunderbolt DAS devices suffice for their needs? The answers to these questions will determine the real-world impact and success of the TVS-H874T in a highly specialized market.

QNAP TVS-h874T NAS Highlights

  • Intel 12th Gen i7 or i9 Configuration Options, in 12 Core and 16 Core Versions (20/24 Thread Respectively) with Integrated UHD Graphics 770
  • 32-64GB DDR4 Memory (128GB in Testing)
  • PCIe Gen 4 Architecture (PCIe 4×6 PCIe Upgrade Slot and PCIe 4×4 M.2 NVMe)
  • 8x SATA Bays, Supporting the latest 20TB & 22TB Hard Drives
  • Thunderbolt 4 Connectivity
  • 350W Internal PSU (Graphics Cards Supported)
  • HDMI/KVM Support with USB 3.2 Gen 2 10Gb Connections, Type C and Type A
  • Choice of ZFS or EXT4 System Software and File System

QNAP TVS-h874T NAS Review – Quick Conclusion

In summarizing the capabilities and potential of the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS, released as a late 2023 update to its predecessor, it’s clear that this system represents a significant leap forward in desktop NAS technology. Priced over £2500, it’s a substantial investment, designed with future-proofing in mind. The TVS-h874T not only maintains the longevity and high-end status of the TVS-h874 but also brings to the table enhanced direct data access through Thunderbolt 4 integration. This advancement, supporting IP over Thunderbolt protocol, significantly boosts connectivity and speed, making the system an ideal choice for demanding tasks such as 8K video editing and high-performance computing needs in business environments.

However, the question of whether Thunderbolt NAS is the right fit for all users remains. For those requiring high-speed, multi-user access and scalability, the TVS-h874T is a strong contender. Its support for the latest PCIe 4 standards ensures compatibility with high-performance upgrades, reinforcing its position as a future-proof investment. The software, featuring QTS and QuTS, might require some acclimatization, particularly for those familiar with simpler systems like Synology’s DSM. Yet, the benefits, especially for ZFS enthusiasts, are undeniable, offering advanced RAID management and a plethora of applications and services.

The TVS-h874T’s stance on open hardware and software compatibility is a significant plus in an industry increasingly leaning towards proprietary systems. It accommodates a range of third-party hardware and software, adding to its versatility. In the face of growing concerns over NAS security, the system is well-equipped with comprehensive tools and settings for enhanced security and data protection, addressing the pressing issue of ransomware attacks. In conclusion, the QNAP TVS-h874T stands out as an exceptional choice for businesses and power users who require a robust, scalable, and secure NAS solution. It offers an excellent balance of price, performance, and features, making it a worthy investment for those seeking top-tier server-side capabilities. However, for users with simpler storage needs or those not requiring the advanced features of Thunderbolt NAS, traditional Thunderbolt DAS devices might be a more suitable and cost-effective option. The TVS-h874T, with its advanced capabilities, is undoubtedly a powerhouse in NAS technology, but its full benefits will be best realized by those whose requirements align closely with what this advanced system has to offer.

SOFTWARE - 9/10
HARDWARE - 10/10
PERFORMANCE - 10/10
PRICE - 7/10
VALUE - 7/10


8.6
PROS
👍🏻Only brand rolling out i9 Turnkey NAS
👍🏻Only NAS Rolling out Thundebrolt4 NAS (for now!)
👍🏻Upto 20 Cores, 24 Threads and High End Integrated Graphics
👍🏻PCIe Gen 4 x16 Upgrade Slot for 10/25/100GbE Cards and 2x PCIe Gen 4 x4 M.2 NVMe Slots for 7GB SSDs
👍🏻No Obstinant 3rd Party Hardware Limitations on Support or Compatibility
👍🏻Much larger support of 3rd Party Software Services than most other NAS Brands
👍🏻10Gb/s USB Connectivity, in Type A and Type C
👍🏻Upto 64GB of Memory
👍🏻ZFS or EXT 4 File System Choice
👍🏻M.2 NVMe SSD Bays can be used for Storage or Caching
👍🏻Volume Encryption, SED SSD Support and WORM
👍🏻Enhanced AI Surveillance Services, with opt to upgrade with $30 Google TPU
👍🏻AI Photo Management Tool (QuMagie) Includes Thing Recognition and works offline
👍🏻ALL the ZFS Benefits, whilst also the GUI and App benefits of a Linux Software Platform in one
CONS
👎🏻No Smaller 4-Bay Version
👎🏻QVR Elite (not QVR Pro) only has 2 Cam Licences
👎🏻Lack of ECC Memory will annoy some users
👎🏻10Gbe is Missing (so no TB-TO-10GbE Pass-through)
👎🏻Too Many licenses on Enterprise Tools (Drive Analyzer, Face Tiger, etc) with too few free licenses
DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?


These Offers are Checked Daily

QNAP TVS-h874T NAS Review – PACKAGING & ACCESSORIES

The retail box of the QNAP TVS-874 NAS is fairly standard and pretty much the same as the bulk of other devices in this tier of storage. Large brown box, big sticker denoting the device inside and it’s architecture – all pretty normal (if a little dull) stuff. That said, I am always very interested in the actual protection that is afforded to these devices in transit in terms of protection from shock, motion and pressure damage. Despite the QNAP TVS-874 NAS arriving unpopulated (i.e. no drive media included), there are still quite fragile devices that are susceptible to silent damage (cracks on the internal boards, loosening of connectors internally, dislodging of transistors or chips that often you do not realise happened till months/years down the line). In the case of the QNAP TVS-874 NAS, this device has a fantastically dense level of protection.

The unit is encased in a rigid hard foam that 100% prevents the device moving in transit, as well as absorbing the bulk of any physical or shock-based impact when in transit (built in Taiwan, these devices will travel more than half the globe easily). The accessories kit is held tightly in a pre-cut panel in the foam and that is pretty much it! Unless a forklift truck arm manages to punch a pallet of these in a warehouse, this is pretty much as good a level of protection as you can get. Indeed, there is enough protection here that I would ship this fully populated with little to no concern frankly. Let’s discuss what is included in the QNAP TVS-874 retail kit.

There is actually not too much in the way of accessories included with the QNAP TVS-874 NAS. No external PSU (it is a chunky internal 350W), only one ethernet cable (CAT 5e), screws for 3.5 and 2.5″ media (despite the trays being click-and-load), keys for the bays, external mains lead and docs related to the product. Not a vast amount, but pretty much everything you are going to need.

The included documents are a first-time setup manual (very light on details and far more recommended to use online resources), information on the included 3 years warranty and details on how to extend that warranty to 5 years. The cost of adding two additional years of warranty is typically relative to the cost of the device. So, for example, a TS-464 that costs around £550 will cost around £89 to add 2 more years, whereas the £2500 TVS-h874T i7 version will cost you £599. The extra warranty is purely optional and although it took QNAP longer than many wanted to create a much more user-friendly warranty support system (they now have the colour-coded system), its good to have that choice available. Extra warranty used to only be an option that could be applied in the first 60 days of ownership, but has been extended recently to within the first 9 months for a limited time. Otherwise, you still have the 3 years of hardware warranty and effective product-lifespan support in software (generally around 8-10 years depending on the device) in firmware updates that include security and service extras.

Another very, very small extra in the accessories pack that I am both happy (and sad) about is the inclusion of a couple of adhesive heatsinks that you can attach to drives installed in the two M.2 NVMe 2280 bays. Now, on the one hand, this is good because it is surprising how few brands/devices that feature M.2 NVMe SSD bays (most NAS’ these days actually) do NOT include heatsinks in the NAS retail kit, despite M.2 NVMe SSDs getting very hot during sustained access – something that forms a big part of SSD caching. So, I AM chuffed they are included (they are not expensive and show the brand is aware of this temp factor), however they are pretty small! I know that the only component you should worry about really is the SSD Controller (it will bottleneck/throttle when too hot), as the storage NAND works better when warm – but it would have been nice if QNAP included full-length 2280 Hheatsinks (they are like $10) instead. Still, better to have them than not at all!

That said, the fact the system does not arrive with a Thunderbolt 4 Cable is a little disappointing. I can appreciate that USB-C Thunderbolt 4 certified cables are not cheap, but nor is the TVS-h874T and unlike a mains power cable, ethernet cable or a USB cable, Thunderbolt 4 cables are not so common. This is additionally exacerbated by the fact that there is a non-Thunderbolt version of this device (the TVS-h874), so it is not as if someone will choose this version unless they specifically want to use Thunderbolt 3/4.

The accessories included with the QNAP TVS-874 are fairly standard stuff, which is not a bad thing. The protection afforded to it in transit is first class and although the retail packaging itself is a bit bland (again, enterprise product that is bought over the internet – so why make it ‘snazzy’), overall QNAP TVS-874 NAS presentation is pretty spot on – it’s just a shame about the lack of a TB4 cable. Let’s discuss the design of the system itself.

QNAP TVS-h874T NAS Review – Design

The design of the QNAP TVS-h874T chassis is very similar to that of the TVS-872XT, which is unsurprising as that was the debut for this NAS design and one that has continued in most of the brand’s high-profile releases in the 5 years. It is pretty much the classic 8 SATA bay shape you would expect, but there are a few elements that are seemingly still quite unique to QNAP. As you might expect, the chassis design is largely metal throughout (with areas of the front panel and trays in plastic) that aids heat dissipation in this 24×7 server, with ventilation on practically all sides working in conjunction with a more enterprise internal fan arrangement (more on that later). Although the bulk of the physical space is dedicated to those storage bays, this system is still a bit deeper than many 8-Bay devices on the market (such as the Synology DS1821+ and Lockerstor 8), which is largely down to a larger degree of internal cooling, aggressively sized CPU heatsink and larger PCIe expandability.

Of course, one physical design feature on the TVS-h874T that is slowly growing out of fashion (but still, in my opinion, has tremendous utility) is the front visible LCD panel that gives you realtime information about the system operation, along with navigation buttons. Now, on the face of it, an LCD panel on a network/remote access storage device seems a bit redundant. However, speaking on behalf of the IT storage community, having that extra option to visible SEE the nature of an alert (RAID degradation, temp sensor, etc) without the need to log in, go through 2-step authentication and access the logs is a nice extra feature. The same goes for the ability to cycle through the device’s LCD options to find out the IP and identity of the device, so you can go straight in without having to use network scanners to locate the device. It’s a small extra and although it is by no means worth the price of admission on this £2.5K NAS, I am glad it is still there in the 2023 generation.

Another thing this device needs to take ALOT more seriously than many other NAS devices of the same storage scale is ventilation. The system TECHNICALLY has 4 fans! 1 PSU fan (doesn’t really count), two large 120m fans on the rear and an additional 80mm fan beside them. This large arrangement of fans runs in conjunction with heatsinks that are arranged across the main controller boards (with the CPU heatsink being especially large). Given this system will be running a hugely powerful CPU, PCIe 4 M.2 SSDs (notorious for getting quite hit in operation at peak), those two PCIe slots (Gen 4 and Gen 3) AND 8 bays of SATA storage – cooling in 24×7 deployment is going to be CRUCIAL! I was always impressed by the cooling system on the TVS-872XT/X, but there is no avoiding that this is not exactly going to be a whisper-quiet system! Indeed, those content creators and editors in post-production that are considering this system for editing on PCIe4 Storage over 10GbE (or scaling up towards 25/40Gb on SFP or Thunderbolt) should be aware that close proximity to the device is going to be hard going! Again, at this scale of storage and level of design, this should come as no surprise – but it is still worth noting.

The eight storage bays of the TVS-h874T use QNAP’s plastic click-n-load plastic trays. Nicely designed, rigid and is not going to be affected by heat. The trays support toolless 3.5″ media installation (as well as holes for screwing in 2.5″ media). The TVS-h874T can be populated with a little as a single HDD/SSD if you choose (which would be odd!), but partial population is growing in popularity these days, thanks to larger 20TB, 22TB and even 24TB NAS Hard Drives arriving.

On that subject, the QNAP TVS-h874T does not have any perceived unreasonable limitations on hard drive compatibility and support (something, their biggest rival Synology has been debating with its user base about throughout 2022), meaning that by current commercial HDD compatibility in December 2022, the TVS-h874T can support (in it’s base, not expanded form) 176TB of raw storage. I mention expandability because the TVS-h874T can be expanded using two of any of the range of QNAP expansion devices (scaling from 2-Bays all the way to 12/16-Bays), as well as more if you use the SAS expander options. Expansion on the software side is a little less comprehensive, with your native storage expansion method (i.e just increasing the storage pool with more drives and expanding volumes) still being less smooth/possible in the ZFS QuTS setup than on the EXT4 QTS setup (which you cannot switch between after initialization without formatting the system). Still, this is a huge amount of storage expandability to have, whether you are considering Day 1 partial population or adding new expansion chassis’ later.

Each of the bays is SATA 6Gb/s, with most current enterprise-gen HDDs hitting 260-270MB/s or so (which promised 400-450MB/s HDDs from Seagate in their Mach2 still being rolled out slowly, plus their NVMe HDD EXO series still at the private testing phase at larger data centers at the time of writing). The connections are clean, wire-free combined DATA+Power connectors inside an aluminium cage. The system (depending on whether you opt for QuTS ZFS or QTS EXT4 at start up) supports numerous RAID configurations in RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50 and 60, as well as RAIDZ and especially business-centric triple parity configs. Opting for ZFS as your file system at initialization also allows you to benefit from considerably faster RAID build speeds (as the traditional volume layer is absent), RAID resilvering (ie re-introducing drives that have the same party/raid-group data that were cloned or accidentally ejected, is dramatically reduced in rebuild time to minutes, not hours), and other benefits towards inline data compression and deduplication (covered later).

Whereas the EXT4 setup, though lacking these ZFS advantages, DOES allow you to expand storage on the fly more easily and also allows you to take advantage of the QTier combined storage media pools (again, more on that later). The only thing missing for me is a fluid RAID system (such as Synology’s SHR, Drobo’s BeyondRAID or Terramaster’s TRAID) that allows you to use HDD/SSDs of different capacities in a single RAID and be able to take advantage of the higher capacities. I am still kinda surprised that they have yet to introduce this in their software and services. Still, this is a very minor blip on an otherwise great selection of storage services and support.

Alongside the LCD Panel mentioned earlier, the TVS-h874T also has numerous LEDs that denote system activity (much like other NAS brands that ditched LCD panels) These cover the individual eight storage bays health and activity, the system access activity, network status, USB access and even dedicated LEDs for the M.2 NVMe SSD Bays inside. These LEDs (and the LCD in fact) can have their brightness decreased or deactivated if you want.

The system also has a front-mounted USB Copy Button and USB 3.2 Gen 2 (10Gb/s) port for local backups. QNAP was the first to include these faster USB 10Gb ports to their systems (as far back as 2017 in fact), and alongside the port, there are also two more on the rear of the device. QNAP also has one of the broadest ranges of compatible USB devices (storage, 2.5/5G network adapters, wireless adapters, office peripherals, remote controls, tuners and more), as well as allowing you to assign them to virtual machines. I know one-touch copy buttons are a little old hat (local in a remote access world), but speaking as someone who have never REALLY trusted ‘autosave’ in software, the idea that my local USB backups can be triggered automatically, on a schedule OR MANUALLY by hand, is a range of choice I will always appreciate!

Overall, although very little has changed in the external design of the TVS-h874T compared with the 4-5 years older TVS-872XT, that is not a bad thing. They have clearly refined the cooling in this time, adapted a few new hardware upgrades into an existing framework and it still continues to be a remarkably well-built chassis in 2022/2023. Let’s discuss the external connectivity of the TVS-h874T NAS.

QNAP TVS-h874T NAS Review – Ports & Connections

The connectivity that the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS arrives with is all good, if fairly standard stuff (unless you opt for the Intel i9 version – more on that later). As mentioned earlier, there are a plethora of fans on the rear of this 8-Bay, but when it comes to the default connections on offer, there is only really three. It is in it’s long term scalability that the connections of the QNAP TVS-h874T that things start to get a little spicy.

Despite this being a desktop NAS, an external PSU Is completely out of the question. Even if you only factor in the eight SATA bays and core CPU/Memory setup, this would still push the required base power needed to make an internal PSU largely inevitable. However, once you factor in the Gen 4 PCIe slots and Gen 4 M.2 NVMe slots, we are talking hundreds of watts potentially being needed. The QNAP TVS-h874T NAS has an internal chunky 350W PSU that, although relatively easy to replace later down the line through QNAP or 3rd parties, is going to be a small pain to actually get to. Not a big issue, but one worth factoring in, as the PSU is the 2nd most fragile part of any NAS system. This system also has the support of some GPU cards, though the PSU lacks any additional power connectors for beefier upgrade cards.

The default network ports of the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS are 2.5GbE, with the system arriving with two ports. Using Link Aggregation/Port Trunking or SMB Multichannel in supported setups to hit between 279MB/s and 558MB/s. This eight-bay NAS will EASILY saturate this kind of bandwidth (even with rather domestic class storage media), but it is when you start to factor in upgrades towards 10GbE and 25GbE ports on this system that you will really see it stretch it’s muscles!

The QNAP TVS-h874T-i9-64G version of this series arrives with two 10GbE ports by default (something that I think is a bit of an oversight on the i5 and i7 models) but even then, the combination of 8 bays of SATA storage, 2x M.2 NVMe PCIe Gen 4 Bays and potential to add PCIe 4 NVMe storage and/or Network combo cards means that this system has TENS OF THOUSANDS of Megabytes of internal performance potential. So how much of that can actually be realized externally? Well, going by QNAP’s published performance figures (as I personally simply do not have the hardware environment to simulate this), we can see the following:

In short:

  • 2.5GbE x1 = 295MB/s Sequential Read, 295MB/s Sequential Write
  • 2.5GbE x2 = 590MB/s Sequential Read, 590MB/s Sequential Write
  • 10GbE x1 = 1179MB/s Sequential Read, 21179MB/s Sequential Write
  • 10GbE x2 = 2344MB/s Sequential Read, 2344MB/s Sequential Write
  • 25GbE x1 = 2948MB/s Sequential Read, 2954MB/s Sequential Write
  • 25GbE x2 = 3313MB/s Sequential Read, 3231MB/s Sequential Write

Note – RAID Volume: RAID 50 (8 bay and above), RAID 5 (4 bay to 6-bay), RAID 1 (2 bay), Single (1 bay). SSD / HDD : Fully populated, Samsung 860 EVO 1TB SATA SSD / Seagate ST1000NM0033 1TB HDD / Samsung PM9A1 960GB M.2 NVMe PCIe Gen4 / Samsung PM9A3 (MZQL2960HCJR-00A07) 960GB U.2 NVMe PCIe Gen4

However, the above stats have seen an upgrade, since the release of newer high-performance media, improved network adapters and how the system can bond multiple connections. The QNAP TVS-h874T benefits from the advancement in this technology in the year since the non-Thunderbolt version arrived with the following performance over 25GbE optional network adapters:

RAID 50, Fully populated, Samsung 860 EVO 1TB SATA SSD / Seagate ST1000NM0033 1TB HDD / Samsung PM9A1 960GB M.2 NVMe PCIe Gen4 / Samsung PM9A3 (MZQL2960HCJR-00A07) 960GB U.2 NVMe PCIe Gen4

Obviously, these are official stats and your own individual performance is going to be different (different storage media, RAID config, client hardware, file sizes, etc), but given these figures are based on SATA storage and do not even factor in the performance of storage pools made of those M.2 NVMe SSDs over PCIe 4×4 (so 6-7GB performance potential, which is where 100GbE cards start to become useful), these are still incredible performance figures!

The QNAP TVS-h874T also arrives with an HDMI output that can be used in conjunction with QNAP HD Station to create a completely parallel external GUI. This GUI has its own range of 1st and 3d party applications available that span a large number of services – Multimedia, office work, surveillance, standalone PC use and more. All the while, with QuTS/QTS running on the NAS with ALL its services still running. Oddly, the HDMI port is HDMI 1.4b, which means that although it will output 1080p at 60FPS, it will cap 4K at 30FPS. This aside, the QNAP TVS-h874T also benefits from HD Station, a parallel GUI that runs with QTS/QUTS to deploy numerous applications with a visual output. There are several key applications in the QNAP lineup that can take advantage of this feature, such as Photo, Music and Video station, as well as allowing a standalone Surveillance station with KVM support and even running a standalone PC with a connected keyboard and mouse. This is joined with several 3rd party apps for multimedia, office tools and communication. This combined with the wide range of unofficial third-party tools in the homebrew site ‘QNAP Club’ results in a tremendously versatile additional use for your NAS.

That said, HD Station in QTS/QuTS has received fewer improvements in recent years compared with other apps in the brand’s lineup, leading to several apps becoming less stable or simply unusable when connected with QTS/QuTS (eg QuMagie on QuTS and Photo Station on HD Station being largely uncommunicative). Its a shame, because aside from Asustor, QNAP is still one of the few brands to offer this feature on their platform and for those of you looking to directly output the media to a 4K TV (with a remote control over IR, USB or over the network with QRemote) it will result in a less polished experience. Alongside the HDMI output, the NAS also features USB 3.2 Gen 2 (10Gb/s) ports. This means that alongside the support of a wide range of accessories and expansion devices,  you can connect 1,000MB/s external storage – VERY useful for those that want to add a convenient and affordable USB backup to their existing multi-tier backup strategy. Indeed, the range of expansions that are supported by the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS are pretty broad, ranging from 2-Bays, all the way upto mixed media 16-Bays!

However, the biggest potential upgrade/scalability element of the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS that we still need to discuss is the PCIe Upgrade slots. Thanks to the 12th gen Intel Core that this NAS arrives with, the main PCIe upgrade slots are PCIe Gen 4×4 and (wait for it) PCIe Gen 4 x16!!! This means that one slot has a potential 8,000MB/s of bandwidth available to a connected card, and the other has a staggering 32,000MB/s available. Just to put that in perspective, a 10GbE will need 1000MB/s of bandwidth to allow full saturation. You could install a dual port 100GbE network upgrade card in this slot and there would STILL be more than a third of the available bandwidth potential remaining untapped!

The support of PCIe Gen 4 in the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS is something that puts this system into a whole different tier of storage compared with all other 8-Bay Desktop NAS systems right now, with the bulk of them arriving with PCIe Gen 3 or even PCIe Gen 2. These two PCIe 4 upgrade slots AND the two M.2 NVMe PCIe4 M.2 NVMe slots mean that you have the potential to comfortably hit internal performance numbers with those two SSD drives that dwarf anything the eight SATA drives (even with SSDs) could ever hit. For video editors that are considering a NAS for post-production in multiple 4K video edits and/or beginning with 8K in their workflow, this is the kind of setup that you need to be looking at!

This is made even easier to achieve when you loo through the official QNAP QM2 upgrade card range. The cards, with several new PCIe4 entries, allow to to scale things up in your storage even further with some featuring 4x PCIe 4×4 M.2 NVMe SSD bays or even a 2x 10GbE and 2x PCIe4 M.2 NVMe SSD Combo card. Currently there is no sign of a Thunderbolt 3 or Thunderbolt 4 Card (as seen in the TVS-872XT or TVS-h1288X), but this might well be down to the continued shortage of Thunderbolt components right now (as the Intel Core 12th Gen family has complete TB4 Compatibility).

Overall, when it comes to the connectivity of the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS, the default range of external connections are actually quite pedestrian when compared against other QNAP NAS released in the last 1-2 years, with the lack of 10GbE on the default model (aside from the Intel i9 having 2x 10GBASE-T at a premium) is pretty surprising/disappointing. That said, the scalability and upgradability that the QNAP TVS-h874T affords the end user are pretty incredible and unparalleled on ANY other desktop NAS right now. Let’s get our screwdriver and take a good look at the inside of this NAS.

The WORLD’S FIRST Thunderbolt 4 NAS – But Should You Care?

As previously mentioned, the QNAP TVS-h874 is technically not a new NAS system, but rather upgrades the existing TVS-h874 with Thunderbolt 4 connectivity. QNAP is now well into technically its fourth or fifth generation (depending on how you look at these things) of Thunderbolt NAS equipped solutions, providing a direct and convenient connection between the NAS and a Thunderbolt client system (supporting both Windows and macOS). The Thunderbolt ports are connected via a PCIe card that inhabits one of the slots, but luckily only occupies the lower speed PCIe slot and not the larger and more capable x16 slot. These ports allow up to two simultaneous users to connect with the TVS-h874 NAS directly, cable to cable, as well as allowing the system to continue to be accessed via traditional network and remote internet means for hundreds of users. As these are rear-mounted ports, you are going to need slightly longer cable considerations, as well as factoring in the ambient system noise when in close proximity. The general system operation noise is fairly average for a metal enclosure eight-drive NAS, but once you factor in larger capacity hard drives above 8TB and more enterprise-class drives for performance, this ambient operational noise is definitely going to be more of a consideration for those working in close quarters with the system.

When connecting the device to your Mac or Windows system over Thunderbolt, as long as you have QNAP Qfinder Pro software installed, the system will prompt you to state that it sees that the system has been connected and invite you to mount the drive in a similar fashion to that of a network drive. You will not need to format the QNAP system in order for it to appear, and during the drive initialization over Thunderbolt, you will be invited to map this drive alongside your existing OS client hardware storage locally. When interfacing with the QNAP via this cable, you can access the storage inside at a typical object file and folder level, but you can also access the full QNAP QTS and QuTS GUI just as you would when accessing the NAS via the network or internet.

Performance numbers when connecting with the device over Thunderbolt will depend heavily on several factors. Similar to connecting a traditional Direct Attached Storage (DAS) RAID device, Thunderbolt is just the connection between your client device and the storage. You will need to ensure you have a sufficient number of storage drives and an appropriate RAID configuration to get the best performance possible. In the case of this 8-bay device, if you use high-capacity, more affordable but slower mechanical hard drives, you will need to populate quite a few to start seeing higher performance numbers as multiple drives are being read and written to simultaneously. Likewise, there are ways to improve performance further with the use of SATA SSDs and/or using PCIe Gen 4 NVMe SSDs in the available slots inside the system. These drives provide significantly higher performance but generally come in smaller capacities and at a higher price point. In reality, the QNAP TVS-h874 does not need to be fully populated on day one, and you can start with two or three drives and gradually, over the years, increase your number of drives one by one. Just bear in mind that the real performance this system can output can only be achieved when utilizing the fastest storage media or fully populating the device. Additionally, there is the fact that this system utilizes IP over Thunderbolt architecture to create a Thunderbolt-connected NAS, leading to a significant performance difference compared to traditional direct attached storage systems. Below are some peak performance numbers from QNAP using the highest performance media available:

 

However, we cannot escape the fact that many users considering this device for photo and video editing are not going to be too sure about the main differences between Thunderbolt NAS and Thunderbolt DAS, as there are more to the differences than just performance. Expanding on the key factors from the comparison between Thunderbolt 4 DAS and Thunderbolt 4 NAS:

  • Connectivity: The QNAP TVS-h874’s support for both Thunderbolt 4 and 3 stands out as a significant feature, offering flexibility and future-proofing. This dual compatibility ensures that the NAS can seamlessly integrate with current devices while being ready for future technological advancements, making it a long-term investment for users looking to upgrade their client devices to Thunderbolt 4 in the future.
  • Cross-Platform File Sharing: NAS systems, unlike DAS, provide a versatile solution for environments utilizing multiple operating systems. This is particularly beneficial in professional settings where Windows, Mac, and Linux systems coexist. The NAS’s ability to facilitate easy file sharing and access across these platforms without compatibility issues greatly enhances workflow efficiency and collaboration.
  • Multi-User Environment: NAS systems are specifically designed to cater to environments where multiple users need to access and share data simultaneously. This is in contrast to DAS, which is primarily focused on single-user access. NAS systems can handle multiple data requests efficiently, making them ideal for collaborative settings like offices, creative studios, and data centers.
  • Expandability: NAS offers more robust options for expanding storage capacity over time compared to DAS. This includes the ability to add more drives, utilize additional expansion units, and leverage advanced storage technologies like M.2 NVMe SSDs. Such expandability is crucial for businesses and power users who anticipate growing data storage needs.
  • Price and Hardware: The advanced capabilities of NAS, including support for extensive user access, higher storage capacities, and sophisticated data management, require more powerful hardware. This includes faster processors, more memory, and better cooling solutions, which contribute to the higher cost of NAS systems compared to DAS, which is typically more basic in its hardware requirements.
  • Performance: While DAS offers high-speed, straightforward access for individual users, making it ideal for tasks that require fast data transfer rates without the need for complex networking, NAS systems are optimized for multi-user access and offer a range of services and applications. NAS systems may not match the raw speed of DAS for single users but provide a more versatile and scalable solution for data storage and access in a networked environment.

Each point highlights the specific advantages and considerations of choosing between Thunderbolt DAS and NAS, catering to different user requirements and scenarios.

QNAP TVS-h874T NAS Review – Internal Hardware

The internal arrangement of the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS is actually surprisingly spacious for an 8-Bay desktop NAS with so much hardware potential. The main 8 bays obviously take up the bulk of the available space, but the first thing that strikes you is that there is a great deal more spacing between the components for that airflow.

The rear fans lead to a completely open area behind the main storage bays that takes up around 30-35% of the available chassis space and there is an additional side fan that blows air directly onto the massive silver CPU heatsink at all times.  The main SATA bays are held in an aluminium cage and the PSU is pretty far away from the main PCIe upgrade slots (something of a problem in the older TVS-1282 and TVS-h1288X that made card installation and maintaining cool running a little more challenging).

That silver heatsink (common in 24×7 server systems as opposed to direct CPU fans) is pretty vast and (especially in the case of the 12 Core i7 and 16 Core i9) very much needed! It is also directly vented in line with the separate rear fan, ensuring that it is taking maximum advantage of the active airflow.

Now, as good and fast as the CPU and architecture inside the QNAP TVS-874 NAS is, the way that the specs and choice of hardware in the greater TVS-hx74 range has been distributed is a little less smooth. With a 4-Bay, 6-Bay and 8-Bay version available, you would be forgiven for thinking that it is just three separate configurations on offer. However, the reality is that there are SIX different hardware versions available (spanning five different CPUs, scaling in clock speed, cores and threads) with differing default memory quantities. We already covered that the Intel i9 version also arrives with 2x 10GbE connectivity (absent in other devices and using a PCIe slot). Normally, I would be a fan of the buyer’s option to scale their budget between storage bays and power, but despite all these systems using 12th Gen Intel Processors, each processor has a different level of PCI lanes afforded to it and this then impacts the rest of the system architecture. Let’s quickly compare the hardware architecture of the three NAS systems and their sub-versions:

Feature TVS-h474 TVS-h674 TVS-h874T
# of SATA Bays 4x SATA 6x SATA 8x SATA
M.2 NVMe Bays 2x M.2 (Gen 3×2) 2x M.2 (Gen 4×4) 2x M.2 (Gen 4×4)
CPU Intel Pentium Gold G7400 Intel i5 12th Gen i5-12400

Intel i3 12th Gen i7-12100

Intel i9 12th Gen i9-12900

Intel i7 12th Gen i7-12700

Intel i5 12th Gen i7-12400

Cores 2-Core / 4 Thread i5 6 Core / 12 Thread

i3 4 Core / 8 Thread

i9 16 Core / 24 Thread

i7 12 Core / 20 Thread

i5 6 Core / 12 Thread

CPU Speed 3.7 Ghz i5 Max 4.4Ghz

i3 Max 4.3Ghz

i9 Max 5.1Ghz

i7 Max 4.9Ghz

i5 Max 4.4Ghz

Graphics Intel UHD Graphics 710 Intel UHD Graphics 770

Intel UHD Graphics 730

Intel UHD Graphics 770
Memory 8GB Default 16/32GB 32/64GB
Memory Max 128GB SODIMM DDR4 (2 Slot) 128GB SODIMM DDR4 (2 Slot) 128GB SODIMM DDR4 (2 Slot)

If we skip over the difference in the actual traditional CPU power (which is expected if you were comparing a Pentium and i3 versus an i9), the hurdles start when you notice that the TVS-h474 has Gen 3×2 M.2 slots, whereas the 6-Bay and 8-Bay have Gen 4×4 – so potential bandwidth of 2,000MB vs 8,000MB/s. The same goes for the main PCIe upgrade lanes, with the 4 Bay having that massive PCIe 4 x 16 slot, but the 2nd slot is another Gen 3 x2 2,000MB/s slot. These are very small details, but they could have been easily avoided by either fixing the TVS-h474 with an i3 minimum OR just releasing the series in a fixed CPU=Bay standard (as observed in the TVS-X72 and TVS-1282 ranges). With 3 version of the 8-Bay, two of the 6 Bay and the 4-Bay being very overshadows, the narrative and presentation of the range gets a little messy. Then you can take a closer look at the CPUs themselves and how they scale up.

As you can see, even ignoring the frequency differences (whooah, the Pentium dual core at 3.7Ghz and the i9 at 16 Core 5.1Ghz when pushed to burst), even CPU Benchmark’s scoring of these processors is pretty vast, with the Intel Pentium Gold G7400 in the TVS-h474 scoring 6804, and every other CPU several times higher! Yes, we also need to factor in the running costs of these SSDs (24×7 use on such high-end CPUs is going to add up on the electricity bill), but I would argue that when you are looking at systems like these, you have long since given up aspirations of power saving! The memory that the TVS-h874T arrives with is DDR4 3200Mhz SODIMM and can be upgraded towards 64GB officially, though the CPUs (for the most part) all support up to 128GB on two channels. Sadly, ECC memory is not supported, which is one of the few counter-arguments out there (IMO) for opting for a XEON over an Intel Core in a system like this one. That said, this is still a great level of memory supported by the system and although the base amount changes depending on the system bay number and CPU type you choose (grumble, grumble), I cannot really fault it!

Now, the big guns! Those M.2 NVMe SSD Bays. M.2 NVMe SSD bays on NAS devices are not a ‘new thing’. Indeed, these have been a staple of desktop NAS devices now for a few years and something of an expected minimum. However, the development that has been going on with M.2 NVMes from SSD brands such as WD, Seagate and Samsung has been rather fierce (with the tiniest pinch of slow down caused by the pandemic and hardware shortages relating to semiconductors). Pretty much 99% of all NAS devices that have M.2 NVMe SSD bays are using PCIe Gen 3 (or even PCIe Gen2) slots. This is down to only CPUs that were released commercially in the last 2-3 years having support of PCIe Gen 4 lanes. As the TVS-x874 series and it’s 12th Gen Intel Core architecture have Gen 4 support, the M.2 slots (with the exception of the TVS-h474) are Gen 4×4 – so 8GB/s (not Gigabit, GigaByte) of bandwidth each! This is a huge deal, as that means you can install these super fast SSDs in these bays for your QNAP QuTS ZFS Operating System, for individual Apps/Services (VMs, Databases, etc) and even as your general storage!

The good news is that unlike Synology and its inclusion of M.2 NVMe SSD slots, the 2280 slots inside the QNAP can be used for more than just read/write caching. The use of SSD caching to provide performance benefits to a slower, but larger and more affordable Hard Drive RAID away are quite well established in the NAS industry, using the SSD space to either write files to the system faster (acting as the primary write area, before moving the data) or increase the speed of accessing commonly requested files on the NAS (making copies of those files onto the SSDs, though largely tiny files are optimized and do not really affect larger block/sequential data). So, if you are looking to use this drive in the centre of your content creation workflow or in post production, you could use the 2 M.2 NVMe SSD Bays as your editing space (acting the NAS over 10-25-100GbE via an upgrade card – perhaps even Thunderbolt 3/4 if/when QNAP release one), and the HDD RAID array as your archive that products back up/archive onto. You can even create individual ZFS RAID pools for warm-cold storage, then also use a remote NAS, USB or Cloud space to sync/backup with too. Thanks to features like WORM, Non-Linear Editing (NLE) and locking, you can ensure that data is not edited by more than one user, with the added benefits of using the QNAP programs such as QSync to create native synced NAS folders on your client devices (iOs, Mac, Windows, Android, Linux – with cross-platform sharing) so that other teams of people can work with the data on the NAS. In testing on the TVS-h874T with a Seagate Firecuda 530 and WD Black SN850 M.2 SSD (both Gen 4) we were able to hit 6.49GB/s and 6.18GB/s Sequential Read respectively in the QNAP Storage Manager Benchmark Tool. That is approx 27 TIMES the speed of a conventional NAS hard drive!

However, though the QNAP TVS-h874T supports SSD caching on these bays, it also supports their use in QTier (if you opt for QTS / EXT4 at initialization). This is similar to caching but in QTier the available HDD and SSDs are combined into a single storage area and it intelligently moves files periodically to the appropriate storage media as it analyzes their access and requests. Finally, if you wish, you can use the NVMe SSD bays for just a fast accessing and performing storage pool and volumes of it’s own. These two bays, plus the main SATA HDD bays, plus adding a PCIe SSD storage card in an available slot means that the TVS-h874T has enormous storage potential. These m.2 bays can also be used for system upgrades, but these are still quite few in reality and it is only the google TPU m.2 upgrade that increases AI system processes that are recommended in 2022/2023 so far.

I am well aware of how much I have been ‘banging the drum’ about PCIe 4 architecture in this review, but I cannot overstate how future-proof this makes the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS! It is a shame that the TVS-h874T suffers something of a presentation hurdle for the less technically versed who need to take some time to bone up on the range of specs before choosing the right model, but that does not really detur from the fact that the TVS-h874T NAS arrives with the best desktop NAS hardware I have ever seen! Let’s discuss those software and services found in QuTS and QTS 5 that are included with this NAS server.

QNAP TVS-h874T NAS Review – Software & Services

Alongside the hardware of the TVS-h874T NAS, you also receive the complete software and services package of QNAP QTS or QuTS (currently in version 5.0.1) that can be selected at the initialization. This is a complete operating system. similar in design and presentation to Windows 11 and Android OS, it runs hundreds of applications, services and functions, as well as arriving with many mobile and desktop client applications that allow you to interact with the data on your NAS in a much more tailored way. Alongside this, the QNAP QuTS/QTS software on the TVS-h874T also includes a few extra SSD tools for anti-wearing on SSDs, better ZFS-HDD/SSD profiling and even options to separate the media into storage, caching or tiered storage where appropriate. The performance and services of QTS have been covered many times on this channel, so reviewing it’s individual performance on the TVS-h874T NAS is a difficult task, as we have to look at two key things. Is QTS/QuTS a good software platform and is QTS/QuTS going to give you support of the full range of services that you intend to use this NAS for, in both 1st and 3rd party?

On the first score, I can comfortably say that QNAP NAS software and services have truly come into their own and the balancing act of supplying the end-user with the flexibility to use the system ‘their way’, whilst still keeping it user-friendly is the best it has ever been. Is it perfect, no. In its efforts to make itself customizable in every way possible, QTS/QuTS develops an inadvertent learning curve that may catch some novice users unaware. Likewise, although QTS/QuTS 5 has done a lot of work on its presentation of information and notifications, there is still the odd moment of ‘TMI’ when switching between services on the fly. QNAP’s NAS software is still easily one of the most adaptable in the market right now and allows users to have a truly unique storage environment if they choose and although not quite as user-friendly as Synology DSM, it counters this by being fantastically flexible by comparison (from file/folder structure to 3rd party services support and connectivity). That said, 2022 had a bumpy start for the brand when a series of ransomware attacks were targetted at the brand (them and several other NAS brands) that was caused by a combination of vulnerabilities in Linux (which practically all NAS and Android software is built upon) but also in how applications in the QNAP platform were allowed to have external access. In previous revisions of QTS/QuTS, customization and guidance for changing settings on the system was made very easy and open but lacked a lot of the gravitas and significance that these changes made to the system being highlighted to less experienced users (such as allowing the QNAP to adapt remote ports on your router over UPnP and how the HBS3 program allowed remote access. These omissions, vulnerabilities and communication issues in QTS have seemingly been resolved and QTS/QuTS 5 seems to be a much tighter system on the whole (as much as anything can be once you open it to the internet). But many users still feel that the brand needs to do more and therefore until QNAP can remove the lingering stories of ransomware and malware over time, this is always going to be an existing sensitive issue for buyers. In order to see the extent of the latest version of QNAP TS 5.0 use the links below to the written review and video below released in late 2021 (QuTS 5.1 Review coming in the next week or so):

FULL Written QNAP QTS 5 Review FULL Video Review of QNAP QTS 5

Although the full review of QNAP QTS is available in the article and video linked above, let’s discuss the highlights of the platform. First off there are the software and services for managing files and folders on the fly. QTS/QuTS includes several tools for managing files in your web browser (with full copy, paste, archive, extract, sharing, etc options built-in), as well as smart system/file search functionality. It is worth noting that 95% of the apps and services in either QuTS and QTS are identical, but there are a few exceptions that are restricted to either version for reasons of file system architecture and end-user. For example, as QuTS is ZFS based, it does not require the volume layer and writes are committed directly to the storage pool of drives.

The security when using your TVS-h874T NAS (again, a continued area of contention and criticism for QNAP in the past) in terms of customization and alerts have been noticeably improved and upgraded in both their deployment and presentation in QTS. These range from a multi-layered security advisor to control anti-malware scans, anti-virus schedules, firewall monitoring and more. There is also a range of access and security credential tools that are quite far-reaching all built-in. With QNAP having to prove its platform is safe more than most, there is a bit shift positively in this direction in the latest versions of QTS.

Overall storage management, access, mounting and how this factors into backups have also been massively diversified in QTS and along with numerous means to create a very unique storage system (factoring RAID, multi-stage 1-2-3 backups, connecting with cloud drive/objects and how this is presented to the end-users are incredibly deep. It can lead to a situation in which the end-user is a pinch overwhelmed, but you cannot say that QNAP is not providing the tools – they are just almost TOO numerous in their presentation.

The same goes for multimedia handling on the QNAP TVS-h874T, with a wide range of tools for handing photos, music and video in a tailored GUI to each media type. This is made considerably easier with QNAP’s multimedia console tool that provides a single GUI that can be used to handle all the backend setup of all your individual media apps. QNAP also provides AI photo recognition to allow decades of photos to be searched intelligently for people and subjects to quite an impressively deep degree (not needing internet access to do so, with the AI onboard the system). Then you have support for a wide range of 3rd party multimedia tools such as Plex media server, Emby, Twinky and Kodi (unofficially).

Then you have business tools (small, medium or even enterprise) included that can range from the deployment of multiple virtual machines across many platforms and a dedicated 1st party container deployment tool. One very unique feature of QNAP QTS compared with other NAS brands in their deployment of VMs is that they include 2-3 click download options in their respective applications that allow you to download ready to use VM in Windows 7,8 and 10, as well as a VM market place for more enterprise virtual clients and even a Ubuntu 18/19/20 VM deployment tool that allows you to quickly set up a VM and then access remotely OR use the HDMI+KVM set up locally. The container station tool also has its own pre-built tool repository too.

Finally, for surveillance use, the TVS-h874T arrives with QVR Pro which allows you to have a business-class surveillance platform hosted on your NAS. This platform has its very own GUI that supports thousands of IP Camera brands, as well as the software arriving with 8 camera licenses with the TVS-h874T, a multi-camera feed display, intelligent alerts, AI services (hardware appropriate), multiple client tools for mobile/desktop clients, integration of 3rd party system management tools and you can even attach USB cameras to your QNAP NAS and have local cameras fed into the NAS too. HOWEVER, if you want to use the QuTS ZFS platform, you will need to use the QVR Elite program which is much more hardware efficient and allows bigger surveillance setups BUT reduces the included Camera licences from 8x to 2x. Additionally, the approach towards the camera licence validity period in QVR Elite is different to that of QVR PRO.

So, software on the QNAP TVS-h874T is pretty diverse and although the brand has seen its fair share of security complaints in the past, I think that it would be hard for me to ignore the range of NAS hardware configuration, services and tools that are included.  Tests of the QNAP TVS-h874T on how it performs as a Plex Media Server, host for Virtual Machines and more will be conducted shortly over on NASCompares YouTube channel. I recommend visiting there to learn more. Below is the short ‘Before You Buy’ video review for the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS (Hour Long video review coming very soon.

QNAP TVS-h874T NAS Review – Conclusion & Verdict

In summarizing the capabilities and potential of the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS, released as a late 2023 update to its predecessor, it’s clear that this system represents a significant leap forward in desktop NAS technology. Priced over £2500, it’s a substantial investment, designed with future-proofing in mind. The TVS-h874T not only maintains the longevity and high-end status of the TVS-h874 but also brings to the table enhanced direct data access through Thunderbolt 4 integration. This advancement, supporting IP over Thunderbolt protocol, significantly boosts connectivity and speed, making the system an ideal choice for demanding tasks such as 8K video editing and high-performance computing needs in business environments. However, the question of whether Thunderbolt NAS is the right fit for all users remains. For those requiring high-speed, multi-user access and scalability, the TVS-h874T is a strong contender. Its support for the latest PCIe 4 standards ensures compatibility with high-performance upgrades, reinforcing its position as a future-proof investment. The software, featuring QTS and QuTS, might require some acclimatization, particularly for those familiar with simpler systems like Synology’s DSM. Yet, the benefits, especially for ZFS enthusiasts, are undeniable, offering advanced RAID management and a plethora of applications and services.

The TVS-h874T’s stance on open hardware and software compatibility is a significant plus in an industry increasingly leaning towards proprietary systems. It accommodates a range of third-party hardware and software, adding to its versatility. In the face of growing concerns over NAS security, the system is well-equipped with comprehensive tools and settings for enhanced security and data protection, addressing the pressing issue of ransomware attacks. In conclusion, the QNAP TVS-h874T stands out as an exceptional choice for businesses and power users who require a robust, scalable, and secure NAS solution. It offers an excellent balance of price, performance, and features, making it a worthy investment for those seeking top-tier server-side capabilities. However, for users with simpler storage needs or those not requiring the advanced features of Thunderbolt NAS, traditional Thunderbolt DAS devices might be a more suitable and cost-effective option. The TVS-h874T, with its advanced capabilities, is undoubtedly a powerhouse in NAS technology, but its full benefits will be best realized by those whose requirements align closely with what this advanced system has to offer.

PROs of the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS CONs of the QNAP TVS-h874T NAS
Only brand rolling out i9 Turnkey NAS
Only NAS Rolling out Thunderbolt4 NAS (for now!)
Upto 20 Cores, 24 Threads and High End Integrated Graphics
PCIe Gen 4 x16 Upgrade Slot for 10/25/100GbE Cards and 2x PCIe Gen 4 x4 M.2 NVMe Slots for 7GB SSDs
No Obstinant 3rd Party Hardware Limitations on Support or Compatibility
Much larger support of 3rd Party Software Services than most other NAS Brands
10Gb/s USB Connectivity, in Type A and Type C
Upto 64GB of Memory
ZFS or EXT 4 File System Choice
M.2 NVMe SSD Bays can be used for Storage or Caching
Volume Encryption, SED SSD Support and WORM
Enhanced AI Surveillance Services, with opt to upgrade with $30 Google TPU
AI Photo Management Tool (QuMagie) Includes Thing Recognition and works offline
ALL the ZFS Benefits, whilst also the GUI and App benefits of a Linux Software Platform in one
No Smaller 4-Bay Version
QVR Elite (not QVR Pro) only has 2 Cam Licences
Lack of ECC Memory will annoy some users
10Gbe is Missing (so no TB-TO-10GbE Pass-through)
Too Many licenses on Enterprise Tools (Drive Analyzer, Face Tiger, etc) with too few free licenses

Need More Help Choosing the right NAS?

Choosing the right data storage solution for your needs can be very intimidating and it’s never too late to ask for help. With options ranging from NAS to DAS, Thunderbolt to SAS and connecting everything up so you can access all your lovely data at the touch of a button can be a lot simpler than you think. If you want some tips, guidance or help with everything from compatibility to suitability of a solution for you, why not drop me a message below and I will get back to you as soon as possible with what you should go for, its suitability and the best place to get it. This service is designed without profit in mind and in order to help you with your data storage needs, so I will try to answer your questions as soon as possible.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Aoostar R1 and R7 2-Bay NAS Review – New Kind of NAS?

Par : Rob Andrews
20 décembre 2023 à 17:03

Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS Review

In 2024, the landscape of digital storage and data management is evolving rapidly, influenced heavily by the rising costs of third-party cloud services such as Google Drive, iCloud, and Dropbox. As subscription fees climb, many individuals and businesses are reconsidering their reliance on these external cloud solutions. The increasing financial burden is pushing a growing number of users towards exploring private, on-site server solutions for data storage and management. This shift is driven by the desire for more control over data, enhanced security, and, notably, a more cost-effective long-term storage strategy. In this context, the network-attached storage (NAS) market is witnessing an interesting divergence in user preferences. On one end, there are full turnkey NAS solutions from well-known brands like Synology and QNAP. These devices are valued for their ready-to-use nature, coming with comprehensive software ecosystems and user-friendly interfaces. They are ideal for those who prefer ease and simplicity, offering reliability without the need for deep technical engagement.

Conversely, the other end of the spectrum is dominated by build-it-yourself NAS solutions, leveraging free software platforms such as TrueNAS Core and TrueNAS Scale. This approach appeals to tech enthusiasts who enjoy customizing their systems. It offers greater flexibility and can be more cost-effective, allowing users to repurpose existing hardware or select components that meet their specific needs. However, this option demands a good grasp of both hardware and software intricacies. Amidst these options, a middle ground is becoming increasingly popular, especially among users who seek a balance between the plug-and-play convenience of turnkey solutions and the customization freedom of DIY systems. This is where products like the Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS units find their relevance. These NAS models aim to provide a compromise, offering the foundational benefits of pre-built systems with opportunities for customization to suit individual preferences. They cater to users who want more control than what standard turnkey solutions offer but prefer to avoid the complexities of a full DIY setup.

Aoostar R1 2-Bay NAS (Intel N100 Version)

Aoostar R7 2-Bay NAS (AMD Ryzen 7 5700U Version)
Amazon >>>

$419 (Check Amazon HERE)

Aliexpress >>>

$309 (Check Aliexpress HERE)

Amazon >>>

$419 (Check Amazon HERE)

Aliexpress >>>

$388 (Check Aliexpress HERE)

Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS Review – Quick Conclusion

Even on a casual analysis of the Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS units, it is clear that these devices offer a compelling option for those in the market for a NAS solution that strikes a balance between turnkey and DIY systems. The Aoostar R1, with its Intel Processor N100, and the R7, powered by the AMD Ryzen 7 5700U, cater to a diverse range of needs, from basic home storage to more demanding small business applications, providing two solutions that provide significantly higher calibre hardware for the price point than comparable level offerings from Synology and QNAP. On the positive side, both models showcase a thoughtful design that maximizes internal space while maintaining a compact external footprint. Their double-sided micro ITX motherboards and the ability to accommodate multiple storage options highlight a commitment to efficiency and flexibility. The ease of access for upgrades and maintenance, thanks to the removable external casing and internal frame, is another plus, making these units user-friendly. However, there are areas where improvements could be beneficial. The cooling system, particularly in the R7 model, raises concerns, especially considering the potential for heat build-up given the powerful Ryzen processor and the proximity of the CPU fan to the hard drive bays. The absence of 10GbE connectivity in the R7 is a notable limitation for users seeking higher network performance. Additionally, while the pricing of these units is competitive, the lack of ECC memory support in the more powerful R7 model is a missed opportunity to appeal to a broader professional market. The Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS units present a viable middle-ground solution for those looking to move away from third-party cloud services or seeking an alternative to the extremes of the NAS market. While they may not satisfy the most demanding users or those seeking the highest level of customization, they offer a solid balance of performance, ease of use, and expandability.

BUILD QUALITY - 8/10
HARDWARE - 9/10
PERFORMANCE - 8/10
PRICE - 9/10
VALUE - 10/10


8.8
PROS
👍🏻- Compact and efficient design with double-sided micro ITX motherboards.
👍🏻- Flexibility in storage options with support for multiple drives and M.2 NVMe SSDs.
👍🏻- User-friendly access for upgrades and maintenance.
👍🏻- Good balance of performance and price, especially in the R1 model.
👍🏻- Support for WiFi 6 and multiple high-speed USB and networking ports.
👍🏻- Windows 11 pre-installed, offering a familiar operating system environment.
CONS
👎🏻- Potential for inadequate cooling, particularly in the R7 model.
👎🏻- Lack of 10GbE connectivity in the R7, limiting higher network performance.
👎🏻- No support for ECC memory, which could be a drawback for professional users.
👎🏻- Concerns about the physical placement of components and their impact on system cooling and longevity.
👎🏻- The R7’s higher price point might be a barrier for some users, considering the noted limitations.


Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?


These Offers are Checked Daily

Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS Review – Packaging & Retail Kit

The Aoostar NAS arrives in a simple, unadorned box, constructed from single-layer cardboard, which seems to prioritize cost-effectiveness over aesthetics. Inside, the unit is nestled in a thin plastic mold that conforms to its shape, providing basic protection during shipping. This minimalistic approach to packaging reflects a focus on practicality and cost-reduction, a common strategy in the tech industry, especially for budget-friendly products.

As this device is designed to balance high value with low cost, the choice of packaging materials clearly indicates where the brand has chosen to economize. The packaging is the first aspect where cost-saving measures are apparent, suggesting that Aoostar has allocated resources more towards the device’s functionality rather than its unboxing experience. This decision is not uncommon among technology manufacturers, especially when the goal is to offer competitively priced products without compromising on core features.

Included accessories are practical and sufficient for setting up the device: an external PSU, a setup instruction guide, an HDMI cable, and the Aoostar NAS unit itself. These components provide the essentials needed to get the system up and running right out of the box. The inclusion of a setup guide is particularly helpful for users who may be new to setting up NAS systems, ensuring a smooth and guided installation process.

The unit does not come with any additional storage drives, aside from the internal OS NVMe SSD which already has Windows 11 installed. This decision keeps the overall package weight under 1KG, making it lightweight and easy to handle. Customers should be aware that they’ll need to purchase additional storage drives separately if they wish to expand the NAS’s capabilities, especially given its support for up to two 3.5-inch hard drives as previously noted. The absence of an Ethernet cable in the package might seem unusual, but this can be seen as another cost-saving measure by Aoostar. It is likely presumed that many users already possess such cables, or prefer to select cables of a specific length or quality to suit their setup. This omission, while minor, is a reminder of the company’s focus on delivering a high-value product at a lower cost.

The included external 90W PSU is a fairly standard component and comes with a local regional mains cable attachment. This power supply unit is compatible with the device, ensuring reliable power delivery for optimal performance. The inclusion of the regional mains cable attachment is a thoughtful addition, catering to the specific needs of the user based on their location. However, the 90W rating of the external PSU for the Aoostar R1 seems somewhat excessive, considering the modest power requirements of the N100 CPU inside the NAS. This higher wattage is likely not fully utilized given the CPU’s efficiency and low power consumption. It’s possible that Aoostar uses the same 90W PSU across different models for consistency in manufacturing, which might explain its presence in the R1 kit despite the unit’s lower power needs.

Ultimately, while the Aoostar R1 system will never fully utilize the 90W capacity of the PSU, this choice might reflect a standardized approach in the production line, particularly when considering the similarities with the Aoostar R7. The R7, equipped with a more powerful Ryzen 7 8-core processor, would have higher power demands, possibly justifying the use of a 90W PSU in its kit. This uniformity in power supply units across different models can be a strategic decision to streamline production and reduce costs. Overall, the packaging of the Aoostar NAS might not impress in terms of visual appeal or materials, but the contents of the retail kit are thoughtfully chosen and entirely functional. The focus seems to be on delivering a good quality product with the necessary accessories for operation, rather than on providing a premium unboxing experience. This approach aligns with the brand’s apparent strategy of offering high-value, cost-effective computing solutions.

Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS Review – Design

The Aoostar R1’s physical design stands out in the NAS market due to its taller stature compared to many turnkey 2-Bay NAS devices. However, when considering its overall volume, it aligns closely with models like the Synology DS224+ and QNAP TS-264 NAS. This height difference, while noticeable, does not significantly impact the unit’s footprint, making it a viable option for users accustomed to the size of mainstream NAS devices.

The ventilation system of the Aoostar R1 is meticulously designed, dividing airflow management into three key areas for optimal cooling. The first area is a large base vent equipped with a 90mm fan, which forms the foundation of the unit’s cooling mechanism. This base vent is crucial for maintaining a steady airflow, ensuring that the internal components remain at an optimal temperature during operation.

Adding to the cooling efficiency, there’s a top-mounted and removable vent panel. This panel not only facilitates easy access for maintenance but also enhances the ventilation by covering the additional ventilated drive trays. The removable nature of this panel demonstrates a thoughtful design, allowing for both effective cooling and convenient maintenance.

The system also includes a robust combined CPU heatsink and an attached copper fan, strategically positioned to direct airflow towards the top panel. This arrangement enhances heat dissipation, crucial for maintaining system stability and performance. The design indicates a careful consideration of airflow dynamics, ensuring that the heat generated by the CPU is effectively managed. While the overall design is impressive, there are some reservations about the positioning of the CPU and main micro-ITX board, especially in the context of the higher thermal design power (TDP) Ryzen 7 equipped Aoostar R7 model. The concern lies in these components being sandwiched between the HDD bays, which could potentially impact thermal management. However, this is less of an issue in the N100-equipped R1 version, which has a much lower TDP and therefore generates less heat.

The main storage bays in the Aoostar R1, although functional, have a slightly flimsy construction and utilize removable drive screw grommets that feel somewhat cheap. This aspect of the design might raise questions about durability and long-term reliability. Despite this, the bays serve their purpose and allow for the installation of storage media with relative ease.

Both 3.5″ and 2.5″ SATA media can be installed in these bays, with the latter requiring additional screws for secure placement. This flexibility in media compatibility is a plus, catering to different storage needs and preferences. The design ensures that the drives, once installed, feel secure in the trays and directly connect to combined data and power SATA connectors internally, eliminating the concern of loose cables. In terms of aesthetic comparison, the Aoostar R1’s design bears a resemblance to the Mac Pro desktop from the mid-2010s or the Drobo Data Transporter. This comparison highlights the unit’s modern and professional appearance, which may appeal to users who appreciate sleek and functional design in their tech devices.

Hot swapping of the 2 SATA storage bays is not supported with the pre-installed Windows 11 software, but this functionality is likely to be achievable with alternative operating systems such as TrueNAS or UnRAID. The flexibility to install different operating systems adds to the device’s versatility, catering to users who require more advanced storage management features. Internally, the Aoostar R1 is equipped with additional storage capabilities, featuring a single M.2 NVMe Gen 3 2280 slot. This slot comes preoccupied with the OS drive, highlighting the unit’s readiness for immediate use. The inclusion of an M.2 slot offers fast data transfer speeds and efficient storage, enhancing the overall performance of the device.

The Aoostar R7 NAS, on the other hand, benefits from an additional M.2 NVMe SSD 2280 slot, also supporting Gen 3. This extra slot in the R7 model provides greater flexibility and capacity for storage expansion, making it a more suitable choice for users with higher storage demands. Finally, the base 90mm fan of the Aoostar R1 operates very quietly, contributing to a pleasant user experience. However, during operation, the CPU fan becomes audible, even under light use. This noise level is possibly due to the motherboard’s placement directly between the SATA bays, which may affect airflow and consequently the cooling efficiency of the CPU fan.

Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS Review – Ports and Connections

The Aoostar R1 and R7 models boast identical port configurations, a design choice that simplifies user understanding across the product line. This uniformity in ports ensures that users can have a consistent experience regardless of which model they choose. The similarity in port offerings across these models reflects a streamlined approach to product design, making it easier for users to transition between different models if needed.

Among the available ports, there are 2 USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type A 10Gb/s ports and a USB-C port, providing high-speed data transfer capabilities. These ports are ideal for connecting external storage devices, high-resolution cameras, or other peripherals that benefit from fast data transfer rates. The inclusion of a USB-C port also adds a level of future-proofing, as it’s becoming the standard for many modern devices.

Additionally, there are two USB 2.0 ports, which are most suitable for connecting peripherals like a keyboard and mouse, especially when using the NAS with its visual outputs. These ports, while not suitable for high-speed data transfers, are perfectly adequate for input devices. Their inclusion ensures that essential peripherals can be connected without occupying the more valuable high-speed ports.

Regarding visual output, the units are equipped with an HDMI 2.0 and a DisplayPort 1.4 connection, both capable of supporting 4K resolution at 60FPS. This capability is particularly beneficial for users who need high-definition output, such as for media servers or digital signage. The ability to deliver 4K content smoothly makes these NAS units versatile in various settings, from home entertainment to professional environments. The support for KVM (Keyboard, Video, Mouse) is dependent on the NAS software in use and its capability to support an external graphical user interface. The Windows 11 software included with these units is a standard desktop operating system, not a server version of Windows. This choice implies that the NAS is intended for users who are comfortable with a familiar, user-friendly interface rather than a specialized server environment.

The default network connection on the Aoostar R1 consists of 2x 2.5GbE ports, which also support auto-negotiation with 1GbE networks. This feature ensures compatibility with a wide range of network speeds and environments, making it a flexible choice for different types of network setups. The 2.5GbE connectivity offers a balance between high-speed data transfer and compatibility with existing network infrastructures.

Users have the option to expand network capabilities using various USB-to-2.5GbE adapters, which typically cost between $15-25. These adapters provide an affordable way to add more network connections, enhancing the unit’s functionality in complex network environments. This flexibility is particularly useful for users who need to integrate the NAS into a network with specific requirements. The absence of a 10GbE port is understandable in the modestly powered Aoostar R1, equipped with an N100 processor, but it is a more noticeable limitation in the higher-powered Ryzen 7 8-Core Aoostar R7. Ideally, it would have been preferable to have a 10GbE port, possibly by repurposing the internal additional M.2 NVMe port to an external 10GbE connection through an adapter or motherboard modification. Such a feature would significantly enhance the data transfer capabilities of the R7 model, making it more suitable for environments with higher network performance requirements.

There is no PCIe upgradeable slot in these models, and the full extent of the PCIe lanes afforded to this architecture is already maximized. This limitation is understandable, considering the compact form factor and the intended use case of these NAS units. While it limits the potential for hardware upgrades, it also ensures a more stable and reliable system by design. Overall, it’s evident that the physical connectivity of the Aoostar R1 and R7 models aligns with the rest of the Aoostar N1 and N7 Mini PC series, albeit with modifications tailored towards a 2-Bay NAS system. This consistency in design across different models reflects a strategic approach to product development, focusing on creating versatile, user-friendly devices that cater to a range of needs and preferences.

Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS Review – Internal Hardware

Accessing the internal hardware of the Aoostar R1 is a straightforward process, involving the removal of four screws located at the base panel. This user-friendly design is indicative of Aoostar’s commitment to making their devices easily serviceable. Once the screws are removed, the external casing can be easily lifted off, revealing the inner components.

Sliding out the internal frame, the double-sided micro ITX motherboard becomes visible, showcasing the compact and efficient design of the Aoostar R1. This reveals the intricate engineering that has gone into maximizing the use of space within the unit. The double-sided nature of the motherboard is a clever use of space, allowing for more components to be fitted into the compact NAS unit.

On one side of this motherboard, the combined CPU cooler and heatsink are prominently featured. This setup is crucial for maintaining optimal operating temperatures and ensuring the longevity and reliability of the CPU. The integration of the cooler and heatsink into a single unit demonstrates a focus on efficient thermal management within the compact form factor of the NAS.

Here are the side-by-side specifications of the Aoostar R1 and R7, which vary in price by around $100-150 depending on your configuration:

Specification Aoostar R1 Aoostar R7
CPU Intel Processor N100 quad-core AMD Ryzen 7 5700U, 8 cores/16 threads
Graphics 24EU Intel HD graphics @ 750 MHz AMD Radeon Graphics
RAM Up to 16GB DDR4-3200 (1x slot) Up to 64GB DDR4-3200 (2x slots)
Storage 512GB M.2 2280 NVMe SSD (optional) 512GB M.2 2280 NVMe SSD (optional)
Additional M.2 Slot None 1 (M.2 2280, NVMe)
Networking 2x 2.5GbE, WiFi 6 2x 2.5GbE, WiFi 6
USB Ports 2x USB 3.2 Gen 2, 2x USB 2.0 2x USB 3.2 Gen 2, 2x USB 2.0
Video Output HDMI 2.0, DisplayPort 1.4 HDMI 2.0, DisplayPort 1.4
Power Supply 90W external PSU 90W external PSU
Dimensions 162 x 162 x 198 mm 162 x 162 x 198 mm
Weight Approx. 1kg Approx. 1kg

There are concerns about the placement of the CPU fan in the Aoostar R1, as it is positioned directly above a 3.5″ hard drive. This configuration could potentially lead to the intake of warm air into the cooler, affecting its efficiency, or it might limit the dissipation of heat from the heatsink. Such a design choice may have implications for the thermal management of the device, especially under heavy use.

Flipping the motherboard reveals the M.2 NVMe storage bay(s) in the R1 and R7 models, respectively. The R1 model includes a single M.2 NVMe slot, while the R7 benefits from an additional slot. This difference in storage expansion capabilities highlights the R7’s suitability for more demanding storage requirements. Each model comes with two SODIMM DDR4 memory slots, offering flexibility in memory configuration. Customers have the option to purchase the device without memory, or they can opt for configurations with 16GB or 32GB (2x 16GB) of 3200MHz DDR4 RAM. This choice allows users to tailor the memory to their specific needs and budget.

It’s important to note that the system does not support ECC Memory, which, while not critical for this scale of operation, could have been a beneficial feature in the more powerful R7 unit. ECC Memory offers improved data integrity, which is particularly useful in environments where data accuracy is paramount. However, for most home and small office applications, the lack of ECC Memory is not a significant drawback. The Aoostar units come equipped with WiFi 6 support, delivered via an M.2 AX Intel WiFi module. This modern wireless standard provides faster and more reliable internet connectivity. The WiFi module feeds into two internal antennas located on the base of the frame on either side, ensuring optimal signal reception and transmission.

This integration of advanced networking capabilities into the Aoostar’s design is an impressive modification of the existing architecture of other Aoostar mini PCs, now adapted for a 2-Bay NAS system. The transformation from a standard mini PC to a NAS system involves more than just adding hard drive bays; it requires a thoughtful reconfiguration of internal components to support NAS functionalities effectively. However, concerns about the physical placement of the motherboard persist, especially considering the Aoostar models are designed for 24/7 operation. While the systems will experience extended idle periods, during busy times, the CPU could potentially experience performance throttling due to insufficient cooling. This concern is more pronounced in the R7 model, equipped with a more powerful Ryzen 7 processor, which generates more heat and thus requires more efficient cooling.

Both the Intel N100 in the Aoostar R1 and the Ryzen 7 in the R7 feature multi-core architectures and integrated graphics. However, the Vega graphics in the R7 are notably superior in terms of performance and capabilities. This difference in graphics processing power makes the R7 model more suitable for tasks that require more robust graphical processing, such as media transcoding or light gaming.

Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS Review – Verdict and Conclusion

Even on a casual analysis of the Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS units, it is clear that these devices offer a compelling option for those in the market for a NAS solution that strikes a balance between turnkey and DIY systems. The Aoostar R1, with its Intel Processor N100, and the R7, powered by the AMD Ryzen 7 5700U, cater to a diverse range of needs, from basic home storage to more demanding small business applications, providing two solutions that provide significantly higher calibre hardware for the price point than comparable level offerings from Synology and QNAP. On the positive side, both models showcase a thoughtful design that maximizes internal space while maintaining a compact external footprint. Their double-sided micro ITX motherboards and the ability to accommodate multiple storage options highlight a commitment to efficiency and flexibility. The ease of access for upgrades and maintenance, thanks to the removable external casing and internal frame, is another plus, making these units user-friendly. However, there are areas where improvements could be beneficial. The cooling system, particularly in the R7 model, raises concerns, especially considering the potential for heat build-up given the powerful Ryzen processor and the proximity of the CPU fan to the hard drive bays. The absence of 10GbE connectivity in the R7 is a notable limitation for users seeking higher network performance. Additionally, while the pricing of these units is competitive, the lack of ECC memory support in the more powerful R7 model is a missed opportunity to appeal to a broader professional market. The Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS units present a viable middle-ground solution for those looking to move away from third-party cloud services or seeking an alternative to the extremes of the NAS market. While they may not satisfy the most demanding users or those seeking the highest level of customization, they offer a solid balance of performance, ease of use, and expandability.

 

Aoostar R1 2-Bay NAS (Intel N100 Version)

Aoostar R7 2-Bay NAS (AMD Ryzen 7 5700U Version)
Amazon >>>

$419 (Check Amazon HERE)

Aliexpress >>>

$309 (Check Aliexpress HERE)

Amazon >>>

$419 (Check Amazon HERE)

Aliexpress >>>

$388 (Check Aliexpress HERE)

Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS PROS Aoostar R1 and R7 NAS CONS
– Compact and efficient design with double-sided micro ITX motherboards.
– Flexibility in storage options with support for multiple drives and M.2 NVMe SSDs.
– User-friendly access for upgrades and maintenance.
– Good balance of performance and price, especially in the R1 model.
– Support for WiFi 6 and multiple high-speed USB and networking ports.
– Windows 11 pre-installed, offering a familiar operating system environment.
– Potential for inadequate cooling, particularly in the R7 model.
– Lack of 10GbE connectivity in the R7, limiting higher network performance.
– No support for ECC memory, which could be a drawback for professional users.
– Concerns about the physical placement of components and their impact on system cooling and longevity.
– The R7’s higher price point might be a barrier for some users, considering the noted limitations.
📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

New Powerful Terramaster F4-424 Pro, F4-424 and F2-424 NAS Revealed

Par : Rob Andrews
29 décembre 2023 à 18:00

Terramaster F4-424 Pro, F4-424 and F2-424 NAS for 2024

TerraMaster, arguably the value/affordable tier of the private NAS market, have revealed three new solutions that form the beginning of their 2024 series of devices – the Terramaster F4-424 Pro, F4-424 and F2-424 NAS. Arriving before their main competitors Synology, QNAP and Asustor, these new solutions are arriving with a more recent Intel N95 and N300 CPU series and will be available in 2-Bay and 4-Bay configurations.

Terramaster F4-424 Pro, F4-424 and F2-424 NAS – Hardware Specifications

At the core of the F2-424 and F4-424 models is the Intel Celeron N95 processor, a choice that balances power and efficiency. The F4-424 PRO, on the other hand, steps up the performance with the Intel Core i3 N300 processor, catering to more demanding tasks. Memory-wise, the F2-424 and F4-424 are equipped with 8 GB of DDR5 non-ECC SODIMM, while the F4-424 PRO doubles this capacity to 16 GB, enhancing its multitasking capabilities. Storage options vary across the models, with the F2-424 featuring two disk slots, suitable for personal or small office setups, and the F4-424 and F4-424 PRO offering four disk slots, providing more flexibility and capacity for intensive data storage needs.Here is a comparison table for the TerraMaster F2-424, F4-424, and F4-424 PRO NAS devices with the correct CPU specifications:

Feature/Specification TerraMaster F2-424 TerraMaster F4-424 TerraMaster F4-424 PRO
Processor Model Intel® Celeron N95 Intel® Celeron N95 Intel® Core™ i3 N300
Processor Architecture X.86 64-bit X.86 64-bit X.86 64-bit
Processor Frequency Max burst up to 3.4 GHz Max burst up to 3.4 GHz Max Turbo Frequency 3.80 GHz
Total Cores 4 4 8
Total Threads 4 4 8
System Memory 8 GB DDR5 non-ECC SODIMM 8 GB DDR5 non-ECC SODIMM 16 GB (Max, dependent on memory type)
Memory Slot Number 1 (DDR5 SODIMM) 1 (DDR5 SODIMM) 1
Maximum Supported Memory 32 GB DDR5 non-ECC SODIMM 32 GB DDR5 non-ECC SODIMM 16 GB
Disk Slot Number 2 4 4
Compatible Drive Types 3.5″ SATA HDD, 2.5″ SATA HDD/SSD 3.5″ SATA HDD, 2.5″ SATA HDD/SSD 3.5″ SATA HDD, 2.5″ SATA HDD/SSD
Maximum Internal Raw Storage Capacity 44 TB (22 TB x2) 88 TB (22 TB x4) 88 TB (22 TB x4)
Drive Hot Swap Yes Yes Yes
External Ports 2 RJ-45 2.5GbE, 2 USB3.1, HDMI 2 RJ-45 2.5GbE, 2 USB3.1, HDMI 2 RJ-45 2.5GbE, 2 USB3.1, HDMI
Dimensions (HWD) 222 x 119 x 154 mm 222 x 179 x 154 mm 222 x 179 x 154 mm
Weight 2.2 kg 3.4 kg 3.4 kg
System Fan 80 x 80 x 25 mm 80 x 80 x 25 mm 120 x 120 x 25 mm
Noise Level 19.0 dB(A) 19.0 dB(A) 21.0 dB(A)
Power Supply 40 W 40 W 90 W
Power Consumption 22.0 W (active), 11.0 W (hibernation) 22.0 W (active), 11.0 W (hibernation) 33.0 W (active), 13.0 W (hibernation)
Operating Temperature 0°C to 40°C 0°C to 40°C 0°C to 40°C
Supported OS Windows, Mac, Linux Windows, Mac, Linux Windows, Mac, Linux
Supported Browsers Chrome, Firefox, Safari, Edge Chrome, Firefox, Safari, Edge Chrome, Firefox, Safari, Edge
Supported Mobile OS iOS14.0+, Android 10.0+ iOS14.0+, Android 10.0+ iOS14.0+, Android 10.0+
Networking TCP/IP, IPv4/IPv6, Link Aggregation, DLNA, VPN, DDNS TCP/IP, IPv4/IPv6, Link Aggregation, DLNA, VPN, DDNS TCP/IP, IPv4/IPv6, Link Aggregation, DLNA, VPN, DDNS
Security Features Firewall, AES Encryption, RSA 2048 Firewall, AES Encryption, RSA 2048 Firewall, AES Encryption, RSA 2048
Price (Approximate) $379 $499 $699

This table provides a detailed comparison across key features and specifications for these TerraMaster NAS models. A common thread among these TerraMaster NAS units is their robust build and reliable performance. Each model supports both 3.5″ SATA HDDs and 2.5″ SATA SSDs, ensuring versatility in storage media choices. Networking is a strong suit, with all models featuring 2.5GbE network jacks for faster data transfer speeds, and HDMI ports for direct video output. Compatibility with various operating systems including Windows, Mac, and Linux, alongside comprehensive security features like firewall protection and AES encryption, underscores their flexibility and security focus.

When assessing these models for purchase, potential buyers should consider their specific needs. The number of disk slots is a critical factor, with the F2-424’s two slots being ideal for less demanding storage requirements, while the four slots in the F4-424 and F4-424 PRO are better suited for larger storage pools and more intensive applications. The F4-424 PRO, with its superior Intel Core i3 N300 processor and expanded memory, is particularly geared towards business environments that require higher processing power and greater multitasking abilities.

Terramaster F4-424 Pro, F4-424 and F2-424 NAS – CPU Differences

The choice of CPU significantly influences the performance of these NAS units. The Intel Celeron N95, powering the F2-424 and F4-424, is a quad-core processor with a maximum turbo frequency of 3.4 GHz and a 6 MB cache, capable of efficiently handling everyday storage tasks. It supports both DDR4 and DDR5 memory types, up to a speed of 4800 MHz, and can manage 4K graphics output at 60Hz, making it suitable for media-heavy applications. The Intel Core i3 N300 in the F4-424 PRO is an 8-core powerhouse, offering a higher turbo frequency of 3.8 GHz, which translates into faster processing and more efficient handling of data-intensive tasks. This processor also supports the same memory types and speeds as the N95 but stands out with enhanced graphics capabilities, owing to a greater number of execution units and a higher maximum dynamic frequency.

Specification Intel N95 CPU (F2-424 / F4-442) Intel N300 CPU (F4-424 PRO)
Product Collection Intel® Processor N-series Intel® Core™ i3 Processor N-series
Code Name Products formerly Alder Lake-N Products formerly Alder Lake-N
Vertical Segment Mobile Mobile
Processor Number N95 i3-N300
Lithography Intel 7 Intel 7
Total Cores 4 8
Total Threads 4 8
Max Turbo Frequency 3.40 GHz 3.80 GHz
Cache 6 MB 6 MB Intel® Smart Cache
TDP 15 W 7 W
Max Memory Size 16 GB (dependent on memory type) 16 GB (dependent on memory type)
Memory Types DDR4 3200 MT/s, DDR5 4800 MT/s, LPDDR5 4800 MT/s DDR4 3200 MT/s, DDR5 4800 MT/s, LPDDR5 4800 MT/s
Max Memory Channels 1 1
ECC Memory Supported No No
GPU Name Intel® UHD Graphics Intel® UHD Graphics
Max Dynamic Frequency 1.20 GHz 1.25 GHz
Graphics Output eDP 1.4b, DP 1.4, HDMI 2.1, MIPI-DSI 1.3 eDP 1.4b, DP 1.4, HDMI 2.1, MIPI-DSI 1.3
Execution Units 16 32
4K Support Yes, at 60Hz Yes, at 60Hz
Max Resolution (HDMI) 4096 x 2160@60Hz 4096 x 2160@60Hz
DirectX Support* 12.1 12.1
OpenGL Support* 4.6 4.6
OpenCL Support* 3.0 3.0
# of Displays Supported 3 3
PCI Express Lanes 9 Gen 3 9 Gen 3
USB Revision 2.0/3.2 2.0/3.2
TJUNCTION 105°C 105°C
Instruction Set 64-bit 64-bit
Advanced Technologies Includes Intel® Gaussian & Neural Accelerator 3.0, Intel® Image Processing Unit 6.0, Intel® Speed Shift Technology, Intel® Virtualization Technology, etc. Includes Intel® Gaussian & Neural Accelerator 3.0, Intel® Image Processing Unit 6.0, Intel® Speed Shift Technology, Intel® Virtualization Technology, etc.

Delving deeper into the usability aspects, all three models boast a user-friendly interface, making them accessible even to NAS novices. Their compatibility with various RAID configurations offers flexibility in data management and redundancy, crucial for data integrity and security. The inclusion of HDMI ports opens up possibilities for direct media playback, a feature that is particularly beneficial in home entertainment setups or digital signage applications. The TerraMaster NAS units also excel in connectivity options, with multiple USB and Ethernet ports providing the versatility needed in modern connected environments. This connectivity, coupled with their compact and sleek design, makes these NAS devices a fit for various settings, from home offices to more formal business environments.

Terramaster F4-424 Pro, F4-424 and F2-424 NAS – Should You Buy?

The TerraMaster’s F2-424, F4-424, and F4-424 PRO NAS units cater to a wide range of storage needs. The F2-424 and F4-424, with the Intel Celeron N95, are excellent choices for general home use and small offices, offering reliable performance for standard storage and media tasks. The F4-424 PRO, powered by the Intel Core i3 N300, is a step up, designed to meet the demands of business environments and power users who require enhanced processing power and expanded memory. This range from TerraMaster highlights a commitment to providing versatile, scalable storage solutions across different user needs and budget ranges, making them a noteworthy option in the NAS market.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Synology RS422+ NAS – Should You Buy?

Par : Rob Andrews
3 janvier 2024 à 18:00

Synology RS422+ NAS Drive – Should You Buy It?

Should the RS422+ NAS from Synology be your next big tech purchase? With such a wide range of private server solutions on the market, it’s never been a better time to be a NAS buyer, looking to move your data away from a public cloud provider, or even to run them side-by-side as a 2-tier backup solution for your home or business needs! Synology has a tremendously diverse range of NAS solutions, but with the previous generation(s) of solutions in their portfolio now appearing on offer, as well as available at discount at 2nd hand eTailers – does the RS422+ deserve your data? We already made a massive review on the Synology RS422+ NAS HERE, but today I want to hit the Pros and Cons head-on and help you decide much quicker on whether this NAS is for you.

HARDWARE HIGHLIGHTS
CPU: AMD Embedded Ryzen R1600 2-Core 2.6-3.1Ghz
Memory: 2GB DDR4 ECC SODIMM (FIXED)
SATA Bays: x4 SATA 3.5/2.5″ Bays
M.2 NVMe Bays: No
Network Ports: 2x 1GbE
PCIe Upgrade: Yes, Only for 10GbE Upgrade (E10G22-T1-mini)
Software Platform: DSM
Warranty: 3yr Warranty

5 Reasons the Synology RS422+ is a Good NAS for You

So, first up, let’s discuss the high points! Here are the five reasons why the Synology RS422+ NAS drive deserves your money and your data!

Note – if you are in a hurry, you can watch my ‘Synology RS422+ – Before You Buy’ video below HERE

#1 – The RS422+ is Compact, Low Noise and has Low Power Use

The RS422+ is designed with a compact form factor, making it easy to fit in various environments, from small offices to crowded server rooms. The device’s low noise level ensures a quiet working atmosphere, making it suitable for noise-sensitive environments where maintaining a professional atmosphere is essential. Its low power consumption is not only beneficial for reducing energy costs, but it also helps minimize the environmental impact, contributing to a greener and more sustainable workspace.

#2 – Runs EVERYTHING in Synology DSM 7

Runs EVERYTHING in Synology DSM 7: The RS422+ is fully compatible with the latest Synology DSM 7 operating system, providing access to a wealth of applications, services, and features that simplify data management and enhance productivity. DSM 7 offers improved security, better performance, and a more intuitive user interface, ensuring an optimal user experience. With the extensive application ecosystem available through DSM 7, you can run a wide range of services, from backup solutions to multimedia streaming, all from a single device.

#3 – Fast/Easy Upgrade to 10GbE

The RS422+ supports easy upgrades to 10GbE network connectivity, enabling fast data transfer speeds and improved performance for bandwidth-intensive applications. This high-speed connectivity is crucial for businesses and professionals dealing with large volumes of data, such as video editors or data analysts. The ability to upgrade to 10GbE ensures that your NAS remains future-proof and adaptable to the evolving needs of your organization.

#4 – Includes ECC Memory

The inclusion of Error Correction Code (ECC) memory in the RS422+ helps prevent data corruption and ensures the integrity and reliability of your data. ECC memory automatically detects and corrects single-bit memory errors, reducing the risk of system crashes and data loss. This added layer of protection is particularly valuable in environments where data integrity is crucial, such as financial institutions or scientific research facilities.

#5 – Storage Advantages in SHR, BTRFS and Fast Repair

The RS422+ supports Synology Hybrid RAID (SHR), Btrfs file system, and fast repair features, offering flexibility in storage management, data protection, and quick recovery in case of drive failures. SHR automatically optimizes storage capacity and data protection levels based on the number and size of installed drives. The Btrfs file system enables advanced features such as snapshot replication, data deduplication, and file-level data integrity checks. Fast repair minimizes downtime and accelerates the recovery process when a failed drive is replaced.


5 Reasons the Synology RS422+ Might NOT Be the NAS for You

While the Synology RS422+ NAS has numerous advantages, there are also some potential drawbacks that may dissuade certain users from investing in it. Here are the top reasons why you might want to consider alternatives to the Synology RS422+ NAS:

#1 – Default Memory is 2GB and Fixed

The RS422+ comes with a fixed 2GB memory, which may not be sufficient for some advanced applications or heavy multitasking. Upgrading the memory is not possible due to its fixed nature, limiting the potential for performance improvement as your needs evolve over time. This limitation can be particularly challenging for organizations with growing data processing requirements or those running memory-intensive applications.

#2 – 1GbE Default Network Connectivity

While the RS422+ can be upgraded to 10GbE, the default network connectivity is 1GbE, which may limit performance for users with high bandwidth requirements. This default connectivity may not be suitable for environments with multiple users accessing the NAS simultaneously or those transferring large volumes of data frequently.

#3 – Lack of Storage Expandability

The RS422+ has limited storage expandability, which could be a concern for users with growing storage needs. This limitation may necessitate the purchase of additional NAS devices or other storage solutions to accommodate increasing data volumes, potentially adding to the overall cost and complexity of the storage infrastructure.

#4 – Lack of M.2 NVMe SSD Slots

The RS422+ does not have M.2 NVMe SSD slots for cache or storage, which could limit its performance compared to other NAS devices that offer this feature. M.2 NVMe SSDs provide significantly faster data access and transfer speeds, enhancing overall performance and responsiveness, particularly for I/O-intensive tasks such as virtualization or large-scale file transfers. The absence of M.2 NVMe SSD support in the RS422+ may make it less attractive for users who require the highest possible performance from their NAS solution

#5 – The RS422+ is More Expensive than it should be!

Despite its numerous advantages and features, the RS422+ is priced higher than some of its competitors at £730 vs similar/better hardware in the desktop DS923+ at £550+, which may deter budget-conscious buyers. The higher cost may be difficult to justify, regardless of it being a rackmount and ‘business tax’, particularly for users who do not require all the advanced features offered by the RS422+ or for those who are not looking to scale up their storage needs significantly beyond older gens (many of which also still support traditional PCIe PCIe Cards). In such cases, more cost-effective NAS alternatives may provide better value for money, while still meeting the users’ storage and performance requirements. In conclusion, while the Synology RS422+ NAS has numerous strengths that make it a strong contender in the market, its lack of M.2 NVMe SSD slots vs the likes of the DS923+ and DS1522+, plus higher price point may be deal-breakers for some users. It is essential to consider your specific storage, performance, and budgetary requirements before making a decision, and to explore alternative NAS solutions that may provide a better balance of features and cost.

What We Said About the Synology RS422+ NAS in our FULL Review

Massive Synology RS422+ Review Article – HERE

YouTube Synology RS422+ Review – HERE

What Synology has produced in the RS422+ Rackstation NAS is an intriguing middle ground between their more cost-effective ARM-based rackmount solutions and their more expensive scalable and upgradable servers. On the face of it, you are getting a tremendously compact but capable 1U 4-Bay rackmount server that, as soon as you factor in the included DSM software and services, is very good value for businesses that want to move their data out of 3rd party cloud and into something they have full control over. Additionally, that CPU (though a fraction divisive when compared previously vs Intel chips in the desktop DS1522+) makes more sense here in this more affordable Rackstation solution. The lack of NVMe M.2 SSD slots, fixed 2GB memory and lack off rails I am less keen on here (and I am still a little on the fence about the way they have pursued 10GbE upgrades in this system) but you are still getting a very well built and small scale NAS solution here and Synology have found a good price point here for this complete solution. Additionally, the fact that Synology has not been so restrictive on HDD use in this system than in more enterprise solutions in 2022 is welcoming too, though they are still taking an odd stance on some drives nonetheless. Ultimately, I can recommend the Synology RS422+ Rackstation NAS to smaller business users, though looking for a compact and very easy-to-deploy NAS solution for surveillance, central business storage, additional backup layers and for DSM as a whole. Though multimedia users might want to give it a miss.

SOFTWARE - 10/10
HARDWARE - 7/10
PERFORMANCE - 8/10
PRICE - 8/10
VALUE - 8/10


8.2
PROS
👍🏻Remarkably compact rackmount server with a 10GbE Option
👍🏻Very quiet for a rackmount server
👍🏻Default ECC Memory will be hugely reassuring
👍🏻DSM 7.1 is still hands-down the best NAS software out there
👍🏻Storage services such as BTRFS/EXT4 Option, Synology Hybrid RAID Support and Fast RAID Rebuild
👍🏻Very high build quality and slick design
CONS
👎🏻Lack of M.2 NVMe slots
👎🏻No Expansion Support
👎🏻Odd brand position on HDDs and SSDs
👎🏻CPU Choice is divisive
👎🏻Default 2GB of memory cannot up upgraded


Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?

Synology 4-Bay Rackmount NAS RackStation RS422+ (Diskless),Black Amazon UK UK 52.62 OFF (WAS 1714) [LINK]
Synology 4 Bay NAS 1.4Ghz Quadcore CPU - RS422+ Rack Station, Black Amazon usa USA 36.93 OFF (WAS 896) [LINK]

These Offers are Checked Daily

If you are thinking of buying a NAS, please use the links below as it results in us at NASCompares receiving an affiliate fee from Amazon:

Need More Help Choosing the right NAS?

Choosing the right data storage solution for your needs can be very intimidating and it’s never too late to ask for help. With options ranging from NAS to DAS, Thunderbolt to SAS and connecting everything up so you can access all your lovely data at the touch of a button can be a lot simpler than you think. If you want some tips, guidance or help with everything from compatibility to suitability of a solution for you, why not drop me a message below and I will get back to you as soon as possible with what you should go for, its suitability and the best place to get it. This service is designed without profit in mind and in order to help you with your data storage needs, so I will try to answer your questions as soon as possible.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

The Storaxa Kickstarter NAS – 12 Months Later

Par : Rob Andrews
5 janvier 2024 à 16:34

Storaxa NAS – What Has Happened in the First 12 Months?

The Storaxa NAS Kickstarter campaign, initiated by Arrowtrack in 2023, marked its first year as a significant entry in the realm of crowdfunding projects. This article aims to methodically dissect the unfolding events and key developments of this period, maintaining a neutral and factual stance throughout. Over these 12 months, the campaign navigated through various challenges and milestones, characteristic of many crowdfunded endeavors. Central to the whole campaigns woes were the reported financial difficulties encountered, notably the withholding of funds by the payment processor Stripe. This situation precipitated a series of delays in production and delivery, directly impacting the campaign’s trajectory. Concurrently, communication between Arrowtrack and its backers was a focal point, with periods of minimal updates and responses raising questions among the project’s supporters. Arrowtrack’s efforts to keep backers informed included regular updates on the production process, supplier negotiations, and hardware design adjustments. Despite these attempts at transparency, there remained an undercurrent of concern among backers regarding the campaign’s financial management and documentation.

This article attempts to present an unbiased chronicle of the Storaxa NAS Kickstarter campaign’s first year, tracing its highs and lows. It seeks to provide readers with a clear, unvarnished understanding of the events as they unfolded, reflecting the complexities and challenges inherent in the world of crowdfunding technology projects.

Currently, at the time of writing (Jan 5th 2024) the status of the Storaxa Kickstarter campaign is not entirely clear. Updates are arriving on average twice a month (based on an annual average). Delivery/fulfillment timelines are still tremendously vague, and communication between the campaign organization Arrowtrak/Storaxa and the 4,900+ backers has slowed down significantly with self-imposed deadlines and schedules being regularly broken. This campaign is still showing life and there is still more than enough evidence to backup that this is NOT a scam. However, long-running silence periods from the company, poor timekeeping and comparisons that are being drawn to other projects that have arisen in 2023 (both crowdfunded and straight to retail) have resulted in questions being asked and no answers being given. Let’s start right at the beginning and discussing what the Sotraxa IS/WAS and how the campaign started.

NOTE – You can watch the full 4 HOUR video that covers everything that happened in the first 12 months of the Storaxa Kickstarter NAS Campaign HERE

The Storaxa NAS Kickstarter from Feb 2023 – What is/was it?

What is the Storaxa Kickstarter NAS and why is it a big deal to alot of potential storage buyers? Well, let’s rewind a bit. If you want to own a private network attached storage (NAS) solution in your home or office, until relatively recently, you only really had two options. The easiest, but more expensive option is to buy a ready-to-go NAS solution from the likes of Synology or QNAP, which is a ready-to-go out-the-box, arriving with its own software and services included (more often referred to as a ‘turnkey’ solution). Alternatively, the more affordable option, but more technically challenging, is to build your own server (or repurpose old tech) and then install open-source software onboard, such as TrueNAS or UnRAID. One option easy but expensive, the other way is cheaper but features a substantially higher learning curve. So, what is the solution? Well, in the last year or two we have seen big increases in a 3rd option, a middle ground between Turnkey NAS and FULL DiY, in the form of NAS servers from companies such as Topton and CWWK (we reviewed one here), which are ready-built desktop NAS devices (CPU, Memory, OS SSD, etc), but either arriving completely OS-free or include popular Open-Source software preinstalled. These solutions not only arrive at an overall price point lower than turnkey NAS (which needs to factor in the software costs and continued technical/software support), but they more often than not arrive with even better hardware too. Better CPU choices, better default connectivity and all of this whilst allowing OpenSource software users to skip the whole ‘build the thing from scratch’ element and get thermal paste under their fingernails! So, what has the Storaxa Kickstarter got to do with this?

Well, because it arrives as one of the most compelling examples of this growing 3rd option open to potential NAS buyers that we have seen. With the Kickstarter campaign arriving at frankly incredibly low price points, even when compared against the numerous alternatives available on Aliexpress etc, as well as a dual OS (proxmox) and Dual network management/NAS architecture too thanks to WiFi antenna, few NAS solutions have promised to delivery so much for so little. So, what’s the catch? Well, Kickstarter! Like any crowdfunded project, the solution is a crowd-funded project that lacks the guarantee of a refund if the campaign is unsuccessful or suitable recompense if the eventual product does not meet its promises. So, thanks to alot of regular subscribers to the YouTube channel highlighting this project, doubts in the air around pricing, all alongside some interesting back-and-forth with the creators, I want to follow the progress of the Storaxa Kickstarter NAS right to when/if it crosses the finish line. Maybe it will be the breaking point for a new kind of solution that established names in the industry wake up and smell the coffee over? Maybe it will not and these videos and paragraphs will simply form a record of what when right and what went wrong. Regardless, it will be interesting to find out!

Storaxa NAS – Too Good to be True? The Initial Pitch

The initial campaign from the Storaxa group for this NAS was made up of several elements. It arrived with a production video that made the system look easy to use and access, not uncommon in this kind of kickstart project presentation. The initial general outlined specifications were:

Base/Entry Storaxa NAS Specifications

  • Linux OS (Promox Base, TrueNAS Scale & OpenWRT VMs)
  • Max 142TB Storage
  • 5xHDD
  • 4xSSD
  • TrueNAS
  • WiFi 6E
  • 2x 10GbE + 4x 2.5GbE
  • Intel & AMD CPU
  • SD + MicroSD Card Reader

The design is pretty much the main thing that stood out. The actual casing, at least as far as a 5x SATA bay chassis) is fairly standard, but it is only when you factor in the additional 4x M.2 NVMe 2280 SSD bays and twin rear dual band antenna that the unique design that is being proposed here standards out notably.

Sketches and 3D plans of the Stroaxa NAS chassis were shown, as well as a breakdown of the main component placement on the internal motherboard were also shown. This was one area where questions arose around PCIe lane distribution and potential heat concerns around the project. Some of these concerns were answered in the comments section, whilst others were approached in the backers-only section. Kind of odd that 

Here is the breakdown of the hardware in the base line Storaxa NAS (further configurations were rolled out later on after a backer poll was conducted):

Hardware Specifications of Initially Proposed System:

  • Intel N6005 Pentium Silver CPU (Quad Core, x86, 2.0 – 3.3Ghz)
  • Integrated Graphics, 450Mhz – 900Mhz
  • 16GB 3200Mhz SODIMM (non-ECC) Memory
  • Five SATA 3.5″ Hard Drive Bays (2.5″ SSD with adapter)
  • Four M.2 NVMe SSD 2280 Slots (Gen 3)
  • Internal 128/120GB SSD (OS Drive, OverP Considerations)
  • WiFi 6 (802.11ax), Twin External Antenna and Dual Band
  • 4x 2.5GbE Network Connections
  • HDMI 2.0 4K 60FPS (+DP)
  • 3x USB 3.2 Gen 2 (10Gb/s) Type A/C and 2x USB 2.0 Type A
  • 20cm x 18cm x 26cm Chassis
  • Twin Rear Cooling Fans and Heat dissipating casing

Here is a similar board below, from the Storaxa pages:

Now, as mentioned, Storaxa has stated that they are using an existing hardware architecture for the internals of the Storaxa, providing a few examples of the architecture and references deep in the comments section. Long before this though, blogs and forums (once again, I have to give props to Reddit and STH here) had already called out that it was likely the boards used in Mini PCs under the TopTon and CWWK branding. An example of which we reviewed – CWWK AIO-T6 6-Bay NAS Review. Bang For Buck? (Massive Review and Hardware Breakdown) HERE on NASCompares

For a closer look at how the CWWK AIO-TT6 NAS looks, you can use the gallery below. 

Alternatively, you can watch the video review below (SELF PLUG ALERT!!!):

Following repeated questions by some users about the background of the team,, the team appeared on a video published on a backer-only update on the 9th Feb ’23:

Additionally, It is worth highlighting that they had already detailed their key members in the initial Kickstarter presentation (repeated below):

The Storaxa NAS Team Members:

  • Marvin He is responsible for the industrial design. He made use of a 3D printer to print the structure and design from CAD. He printed and tested all the parts, and made sure the assembly is feasible and easy. 
  • Matt Wang is our electrical engineer. He is responsible for two parts in the development of Storaxa. Firstly, he communicates with the PCB supplier and solve related technical issues. Secondly, he confirms all the specifications and design of the PCB that connects with the SSDs.
  • Keith Zhou is our procurement and logistics executive. When there is shortage for different parts in making Storaxa, he will find substitutes for engineers and PCB suppliers. He is also familiar with VAT for importing and exporting, as he worked in an international logistics company for the past year.
  • Thomas Li is our system engineer. All of Storaxa’s software development is created by him. For example, he decides which Linux distribution to pre-install, and test the compatibility and reliability between software and hardware
  • Li-Sau Man (Karen) is responsible for PR and customer service. Alongside strong writing and editing skills, she has a good understanding of digital communication channels and tools. She is effective in circulation of internal and external communications including newsletters, campaigns, speeches.

In a backers-only update, there was further information on the Plex Media server performance of the Soraxa, in an unlisted YouTube video. Again, it is good to see some test benchmarks and user case information to relate with, but these videos being unlisted still seemed unnecessary. Original text below from Feb 3rd:

Testing Plex with AMD 5825U

The easiest way to run Plex on Storaxa, is to install the Plex app in the Truenas-SCALE official app catalog. To ensure the system is not constrained by memory, we installed 64GB of RAM, and assigned 50+ to the TrueNAS-SCALE VM. We prepared H.264 30fps 1080p videos, and stream at 720p so as to force Plex to transcode. The streaming client is a MacBook pro connected via an ethernet cable. We managed to run six player instances  simultaneously, each playing a different video, without noticeable stutter.

It is worth remembering that alot of the information above was to only backers, which is still rather odd and only reasons of patent/IP protection might cover this – but it would be an odd stance to take on only the smaller % of the details. Nevertheless, I want to remain optimistic. It is not impossible that the Storaxa can be released and be a good product for the price point, but we are still talking pretty thin margins! For example, a similar Topton/CWWK/etc board can be purchased with the same N6005 CPU, SSD and 8GB of memory for £246 (so, approx $339) on Aliexpress. There are lots of differing examples under different brand names, but here is an example:

And the baseline Storaxa NAS (no add-ons, just the Intel Pentium N6005, 120/128GB NVMe, WiFi 6 module and 16GB of memory) comes in at $274. And that also has to include the casing, antenna, testing, time spent with software installation and testing/Q.C (PLus that free 32GB Memory card too now). Even if you factor in the profit margin that sellers on AliExpress need to factor in per sale vs the savings made possible by bulk buying by Storaxa team at the production level – that still leaves a remarkably narrow profit margin. It was this, plus the comments sent my way, odd presentation inconsistencies (nothing big, but blips here and there) that led to the video below:

Storaxa NAS –  Late Feb ’23 Update

When the Kickstarter concluded, it passed all stretch goals and at the time of writing, the stats are:

“5,917 backers pledged $1,924,001 to help bring this project to life.”

Regarding the Pledge Manager (for users to customize/confirm their order), it arrived a week later than expected, as Storaxa stated Pledgebox recommended aiming for the 25th Feb, so funds would be appropriately wired over and to eliminate errors when exporting backer pledges from Kickstarter to PledgeBox). Additionally, there were further breakdowns on the Storaxa page regarding the Schematics and Main board/layout of each configuration, detailed as follows:

Before we start, here is a schematic diagram of the main board with the key components. Please click on the image to view the diagrams for all the other CPU configurations. You can refer to these diagrams to help you choose your options. For experts and backers with advanced knowledge on NAS, these may be enough. 

After several requests for updated videos of the system being connected and from multiple angles, the following was provided in the backers-only area and via unlisted videos:

Uncut, Unedited Demo

Here is the uncut unedited demos as requested. We included a different angle to show all the cables and you can see that WiFi is disconnected and nothing is under the Storaxa. It can be viewed in 4K so you can see everything clearly. 

As per further updates and details on the stretch goals that were hit during the progression of the campaign, they proposed that they would  include an additional 32GB SD Card with all Sotraxa purchases after the campaign hits $1.9 Million (which it did). Their original update:

Also we have decided on the Stretch Goal #5. For the final stretch goal, we want to add something that won’t increase the SKU and something that everyone can benefit from. Once we hit $1.9 million, we will include one 32GB microSD card with the recovery image for all Storaxa units. You can use it to store snapshots and since you can always leave it in the slot, it won’t be easy to lose.

Regrding shipping, Staraxa state that they worked with a backer volunteer to test ship an item as a demonstration of the means of shipping to the EU and that it was received without any additional tax/customs payments being required:

One of the most asked questions was about extra VAT, customs and taxes that backers will need to pay regarding shipment to the EU. We have already explained that our forwarder has included all customs and taxes in their quotation and they will send it in a way to avoid extra charges to the recipient. During one of these discussions, a backer volunteered to help us test this shipping method to see if any additional VAT was charged. We were contacted by that backer yesterday after she received the package without any extra VAT.

Storaxa NAS – March Updates

The Storaxa timeline has now shifted forward, with pledges stated at 82% of completion as of 27/03. Likewise, the timeline has now been updated on the project by the Storaxa team:

Users who had access to the Pledge manager were given a considerable number of options with regard to customizing their Storaxa, with detailed pricing throughout. There were reported payment issues and bank authentication issues, but these were PlexBox/PlegeManager related. If a user wanted to stick with the default configuration (Intel N6005, 16GB DDR4, WiFi6, 120GB SSD, 2.5Gx4), The Lowest Priced Storaxa NAS Configuration remained at $274:

However, the range of configurations was surprisingly diverse.

Configuration Options –  Wireless Module #1

Configuration Options – OS Drive #2

Configuration Options – CPU Choice #3

Configuration Options – Network Connectivity Choice #4

Configuration Options – Memory Capacity Choice #5

If you wanted to scale the Storaxa up to the maximum configuration of the system (Intel i7-1265U, 64GB DDR4, WiFi6e, 2TB SSD, 10Gx2, 2.5Gx2), that increased the price by $390, making the Highest Priced Storaxa NAS Configuration at $664:

There were also additional options for adding additional Storaxa NAS systems, storage media, spare PSUs and drive adapters.

The Optional Add ons and Media Choices Available:

So, if you wanted to opt for the Storaxa system with 20TB Seagate Ironwolf Pro’, 4TB WD Black SN850X PCIe4 SSDs and spare Boot disk, the Maximum Specification Storaxa System was priced at $2899.

For perspecitve, the QNAP TVS-h874 8-Bay NAS (no media included, 32GB, no 10GbE) is currently priced at approx at $2498 (one example below):

That is a huge saving indeed. This once again makes me want to hope that devices like this can/do happen and can give biggest/etablished names in the NAS industry pause for thought!

Elsewhere. there was continued back and forth regarding concerns about the CWWK board and the diminished SATA speed potential vs the bandwidth/lane allocation across the system (Most detailed example HERE). The Storaxa Team responded 5 hours later, highlighting that the default/baseline configuration will have these more limited bandwidth issues. This is something that many more experience tech users/builders had postulated earlier in the crowdfunding stages, but less experienced users or those less familiar with CWWK/Topton systems seen online might have been less aware. This is another one of those points of presentation where the simplicity of the solution in the initial Kickstarter videos and bullet points have glossed over the capabilities of a system at this pricepoint:

Below was our March update that goes into more detail about the pledge manager and pricing comparisons:

The March/April period also saw the Arrotrack/Storaxa site go live. Though in an early skeleton form that largely copied the content of the Kickstarter campaign (though the March 31st update was now publically visible)

The domain ownership appears to be alot older, but according to waybackmachine the site has only really seen active changes in the last month or so (understandable).

One notable thing is that although the number of unique and available pages was limited, the Fulfillment and Returns page is completed. This is quite surprising, given that the device has yet to or even finished production. This might seem a bit ‘cart before the horse has bolted’, but one could also argue that this is a further positive move by them that underlines that they intend to fulfill, but are also aware of the thin-ness of their profit margins to withstand cancellations at the 11th hour.

April 2023 Storaxa NAS Updates

April (and very late March) saw two main updates to the Storaxa Kickstarter campaign, as well as two updates to the project timeline. This was also combined with a few questions surrounding the business address of Arrotrack (the company that Storaxa creators are trading under).

There have been several references to the project being slightly delayed (not unusual with Kickstarters) and also a few extra details surrounding the regional delivery plans. The key updates from Storaxa though surrounded confirmation of the AMD layout and changes to the Intel schemes.

Free DDR5 Upgrades

Due to a change in the Intel Storaxa board layouts and specification support, Storaxa confirmed that those opting for the higher-end configurations would have an upgrade from DDR4 to DDR5 Memory. This was largely down to these boards not supporting DDR4 memory, but nonetheless, a welcome bonus for those affected.


Future of Storaxa NAS, Post Crowdfunding?

There was also a discussion of Storaxa plans post-fulfilment, with Storaxa clearly indicating that they plan on continuing production after fulfilment of Storaxa Kickstarter units concludes. Hopefully, this occurs after ALL backers have been satisfied, as it is not unheard of for some Kickstarter campaigns to introduce late-stage outside retail options in order to financially support the initial Kickstarter pledges, which might have been priced incorrectly. Again, there is NO INDICATION of this and it is perfectly normal/sensible for them to keep an eye on the future. Indeed, its actually a positive sign in many respects that they are thinking long term.

Talking of long-term thinking and planning, I have to give them credit for sharing some of the background finance matters of the project with backers. As the initial pledges and additional sums garnered by the dynamic pledgebox have rapidly increased the campaign total, Stripe (the financial management in the middle) has opted to hold 50% of the collected funds until the fulfilment of orders begins (for reasons of product and backer satisfaction). This is not unusual and quite a useful safeguard when followed correctly by the intermediary parties, but it is good that Storaxa showed this exchange. I would still have preferred these to not be behind ‘backer only updates’ and it doesn’t change anything regarding fulfilment commitments, beyond the 2nd 50% of collected funds – but it’s still a positive move by them to share this.

There is, of course, the argument that they lose nothing by sharing this and gain goodwill by doing so, but it’s still a net positive. This is what they had to share:

“The result of the review is that Stripe will hold 50% of the funds from PledgeBox until fulfillment begins. Based on the payment terms outlined in the supplier contract, Stripe will distribute payments in the following manner: 50%, 35%, and 15%. We will keep Stripe updated with our mass production status in order to release the funds. For different components, we have to pay a deposit of 60% to 80%. For the main board we only need to pay a 50% deposit for mass production. Although we didn’t expect any funds to be held by Stripe when they asked for the review, the total funds from Kickstarter (100%) and Pledgebox (50%) is enough for all deposits.” Storaxa, April 12th Update

Storaxa also showed the current balance of funds collected at the time of writing:

Lots of positive reception to this move (with merit) and high praise for this transparent move.


AMD 5825U Layout Detailed

The manufacturer had completed the CAD of the main board for the pre-production sample.

Intel Component Changes Highlighted

As previously mentioned, there layouts for the internal boards for the Storaxa for each configuration have started arriving and they stated that due to hardware shortages, there would need to be component changes:

“There is a delay for the upgraded Intel CPU schematic. The manufacturer discovered that there is a shortage for some of the parts in the design. So they need to change to parts with a more stable supply. All main features remain unchanged. It will be ready after April 3. We will publish an update once that is ready. This does not delay mass production. Backers who wish to see the schematics before finalizing their choices can rest easy, because the survey deadline is extended to end of April. ” – Storaxa, March 31 Update

Later in a 2nd April 2023 update, they went on to show the system block diagram that factored in these component changes. These included upgrades to a DDR5 memory channel (which would lead to the free DDR5 upgrades mentioned above).

(later in the April 19th Update)


Business Address Changes

One slight fly in the ointment during the campaign this last month or so arose regarding the business address of Storaxa/Arrotrack. The campaign creators sharted a draft of the invoice that they would be using for finished order fulfilment and the address for this China/HK-based company had changed to a U.S/Denver address:

To confirm, the invoice stated ‘360 S Quitman StreetDenver CO, 80219 US’ and the original Arrotrack company was Unit 1113, 11/F, Global Gateway Tower, 63 Wing Hong Street, Cheung Sha Wan, Kowloon, Hong Kong. This was confirmed in their own company documentation provided below:

A quick Google of the new U.S register address showed a slightly underwhelming business location:

This did raise a few concerns in the comments section and (far play) to Storaxa; they were not being secretive about this address/location. Answering direct questions about this in the comments:

They did go on to further clarify reasoning for this, stating that it was needed in order to proceed with a crowdfunding campaign, due to local restrictions imposed on Chinese companies. The duality of the registered addresses was for reasons of finance and handling returns/shipping.

Below is the timeline for the first half of April and everything, bar the pre-production samples being shared directly with backers (direct images and real-world examples) was correct.

 


At the start of April 2023, we asked Tom @Lawrence Systems for his perspective on the project, it’s viability and his initial thoughts. It is worth highlighting that this was presented his immediate perspective and without any additional research on his part.

May 2023 Storaxa NAS Updates

May 2023 saw 4 official Updates by the Storaxa team on their Kickstarter campaign, mainly focusing on the changing of the system PSU from an external model to an external one, and the Pledgebox credit/payment issues.

Changes from an Internal PSU to an External PSU

This goes into a lot more detail for the reasons for/against, as well as the logic they outline in their decision, but this quote below summarizes it best:

“After careful consideration and evaluation, we have decided to use an external GaN power supply with a 5.5*2.5 barrel jack in 140W/180W/200W depending on the chosen CPU (N6005/5825U/1235U,1256U). GaN (gallium nitride) is a new technology that allows for smaller, more efficient, and cooler power supplies. It has several advantages over traditional silicon-based power supplies, including higher efficiency, faster switching speeds, and smaller size. A Type-C PD power supply was not chosen because of the higher cost we couldn’t fit into our budget. The power supply will be external, which will allow for more space in the case for better thermal management and air circulation for heat dissipation. This also gives users more space for customization inside the case. And it is easier to replace the power supply if needed. We have several suppliers lined up and will decide on the final one soon. Here are some images of the potential power supply. It is meant to plug directly into a power socket. It has a C6 socket, so you can also choose to use it like a power brick by using it with standard C5 cable (not included). The power supply will only come with the plug suitable for your delivery location.” – Storaxa Team, Update 19, May 25th 2023

They also supplied an updated system build graphic to detail the case in progress and adjusted layouts:

May 22nd also saw an update on the motherboard that is intended for the baseline N6005 Pentium models, with the stated arrival of the production sample for testing and assessment. See below:

Storaxa NAS Case Changes

As pleasing as this way, I was more concerned with the production and information on the casing for the Storaxa system, as that is one fo the truly unique elements of this system. How the change to an external PSU and the difference in architecture between the configurations impacting the case cooling/shape was also addressed in this same May 2023 update:

“Getting the first sample is a critical milestone because it lets us finalize the case design. The case sample will be ready in the week of June 5, 2023. Our plan has always been to use the same case for all the different versions of Storaxa. This is so that all units have a uniform appearance and also it will help save on production costs. However, with the introduction of the higher-performance versions, the power supply unit had to increase. And with the increased wattage, we also struggled with thermal management. Moving the power supply outside was the best solution. We thought about keeping it inside for the basic model, but decided against it because it will be easier to have the same case and it will be easier for assembly and repair. The external power supply has many positives. There is more room inside for air circulation for heat dissipation and also gives users more space for customization inside. It can also be replaced more easily.– Storaxa Team, Update 18, May 22nd 2023

The Storaxa Group continue:

“The new case has three easy-access openings, two on top and one at the bottom. The top ones are for the 4 M.2 slots and the boot drive. The bottom is for access to the main board with the DDR RAM and the 2 onboard M.2 slots. The side air vents are also larger for better air flow. Since the power supply has moved, the main board is also raised, leaving more space for personalization and airflow. This means the ports in the back are all raised higher.” – Storaxa Team, Update 18, May 22nd 2023 

They have updated their current projected timeline with the shipping of the first wave of solutions in the 2nd half of July (see blow):

The last 30 Days or so of the Storaxa NAS Kickstarter campaign (going into the 15th May) have been a fantastic mix of good news, bad news and just plain odd news. Although the Storaxa team have continued to respond to comments and enquiries, they have certainly been a little less prompt. That said, between the evolution of the campaign as it moves through the proposed production timeline and a couple of the hurdles that will be covered in this May update, there might be reason enough for these. Let’s go through all the updates (both project-published ones and those made in the comments).

PledgeBox Issues

Pretty much the big topic that has been bubbling around the Storaxa Kickstarter in this period was the Pledgebox manager not factoring in payments previously made to people’s existing backing sums. In short, a % of users found that their initial payments had been ignored and new ‘balance due’ messages had appeared. It is still not certain how many users were affected by this out of the 5,917 backers of the project (though some backers took to reddit to try and poll the numbers of those affected/unaffected), but clearly, this issue was big enough to be raised and referred to a decent amount in the comments. This is the image provided by Storaxa in their update to denote how the issue appeared to those affected users:

What caused this issue in the Pledge manager is still unclear, but Storaxa/Arrotrack did address this in their project update on May 2nd:

“We apologize for a new issue on PledgeBox that crossed out the bonus amounts of backers’ pledges from Kickstarter. If you are experiencing this issue, please wait patiently as we try to fix all the affected accounts within one week. There is no magic button to fix all the accounts at once, so we need to do it individually. Please understand that we may not be able to reply to all your messages, emails, and comments, as we are focused on resolving this issue. This issue does not affect how we will fulfill your rewards so we kindly ask for your patience as we fix this.” – Storaxa Update #16 HERE

This seemingly continued to be raised in the comments section and although individual queries were addressed by the group in the general comments section, it wasn’t until May 15th that we saw the issue fully confirmed as resolved by Storaxa in a full backers only update:

“The issue with the subtracted Kickstarter bonus has been resolved. Thank you backers for your patience as we fixed the problem. If we missed anyone with this issue, please don’t hesitate to reach us so we can fix it.”  – Sroaxa Update #17 HERE

Initial Motherboard Errors and Changes

The board that is to be used inside the Storaxa (though differing fractionally in each CPU Config) had only really been shown in schematic, Diagram and CAD form up to this point and understandably, many users had been chasing for updates on this. Although already volunteered by Storaxa that the board use was being produced by the same manufacturer as the likes of Topton/CWWK NAS systems, real world examples of the mainboard for the Storaxa were still ‘coming soon’. So, with that in mind, the initial update for this on May 2nd was a little bitter-sweet.

Although they showed a board in the update (which had been promised already), it was highlighted that mistakes in the layout had been recognized and therefore more work/time was needed for completion:

“The manufacturer tested the first print of the mainboard last week and discovered that there were some mistakes in the layout. Since it is Golden Week holiday here, the factory will be on break this week. The new samples for testing will be ready next week. We will continue monitoring their work and update you about the progress” – Storaxa Update #16 HERE

Fast forward two weeks and we saw the next update, which included images of the ready-soldered and prepared board for the default N6005 board. Arriving somewhere between the design of the N6005 board HERE and J6412 board HERE on Aliexpress, the photos are a little oblique. I appreciate that Storaxa state the manufacturer has supplied these, but a top-down angle would have been nice. Still, better something than nothing:

There is no avoiding that there has been contention in the response to this update regarding the main board of the storaxa NAS. The first issue for many was that the Intel N6005 model is the entry-level device and many of the much higher configurations (who have paid considerably more into this project since the Pledgebox option appeared) have been left to wait. Now, on the one hand, given that the Kickstarter began with pledging on the initial N6005 configuration, it makes sense that chronologically that would be the first thing to be on the timeline for production. But given the scale of the upgraded components (significantly more power-hungry processors, 10GbE, Gen 4 SSDs, etc) in this compact chassis on boards that are not available right now on AliExpress etc right now, it’s understandable why users opting for these more unique configurations are wondering about their system delivery window.

The other hardware change that has occured in the recent project update was one that many had already raised early in the campaign (myself included), regarding the PSU. Storaxa have opted to remove the PSU from the internal casing of the device and opting for an external PSU (with a promise to elaborate more on this in the next project update). Now, on the face of it, I have always been a fan of external PSUs. They are easier to replace and in some cases, can remove internal heat generation and/or restrictive airflow blocking in more compact systems (more in the case of bare-PSUs, not blocks). However, in the case of the more aggressive system configurations, this might well result in quite large PSUs and add this also raises the question of external PSU quality. That was always a factor in ANY PSU, but ask anyone who has ever purchased a cheap PSU for their GFX-Card laptop or external PCIe Box on eBay/Ali and they will discuss ‘noisy’ PSUs or those that just feel ‘unsafe’. This is pure conjecture right now of course and until the PSU in question is shared in an update, it’s way to early to complain. But some users are definitely less keen on external power bricks in bigger NAS systems, as that can also result in an easy-to-disconnect power connection or extra part to lose!

Delay in Order Shipping and Fulfilment Warned

The above changes regarding the system board and possibly due to the impact of the Pledge Manager issues requiring attention (again, an assumption on my part) have led to Storaxa highlighting delays to shipping an order fulfilment in this campaign. Initially, shipping was timeline’d to start in Mid-June, but now looks like the end of July:

“We have been working diligently with our manufacturer to complete the designs and samples of the main boards. Even though our manufacturer started work earlier than scheduled, not all the pre-production samples will be completed on time within the 45 days stated in our contract. They have explained to us that ever since our campaign, they have become more busy and received even more orders. The estimated dates were accurate but due to not enough man power, any mistakes and redesign delayed the samples. The production time of assembling the units will not be affected. They have been very accommodating during this whole process, so we believe that they are sincere and tried their best to keep to our schedule.  Due to the bottleneck in completing the pre-production samples, the shipping date will be delayed for 30 days. We apologize for this inconvenience and we thank you for your patience and understanding.” – Storaxa Update #17 HERE

Delays in Kickstarter campaigns are hardly unusual and fair play to them for, at the very least, raising it now. It’s still going to be disappointing for many, but after many users quering the shipment date, this is something to go on.

Arrotrack / Storaxa Domain Ownership Expiry?

A rather odd point and one that was raised in the comments of the Kickstarter comments for the Storaxa was that the domain for the Arrotrack company (the group producing the Storaxa) had a very, very short domain registration time remaining. In my last update (in the April Update below) I highlighted that Arrotrack and Storaxa has a website up and running that had further information on the updates made available to non-backers, details of the company (something of a debate there that was discussed) and information regarding terms of returns and support. Well, that domain was registered on 23/05/20 but seemingly is going to expire on 23/05/23.

Now, this in itself is not the end of the world. Notwithstanding that this is not directly connected to the Kickstarter campaign, the company could be moving to a new domain and letting this expire (since realizing a new domain and site was needed). Likewise, they could be running the clock out on it to exchange it’s ownership to a new party. Nevertheless, it’s an odd little thing.

Potential Refunds to Customers of HDD/SSD Storage Bundles

One matter that increased in the comments of the Kickstarter campaign comments of the Storaxa over the last couple of months was to do with the price of storage media. When the Pledgebox manager for Storaxa NAS went live, one of the additional configuration options included adding SATA HDD/SSD media and PCIe Gen 3/4 m.2 NVMe SSD Media. However, since these options were first made available and priced, the general cost of alot of these drives (and other alternative drives that were not included in the Pledgebox from 3rd parties, location dependant) have seen noticeable decreases. So, many users wanted to know if reductions in the cost of drives would be reflected in their purchases (i.e. partial refunds?). Storaxa addressed this in their mid-May update:

Due to the delay in completing the main boards, the delivery of the accessories such as SSD and HDD will also be delayed. Although we already paid the deposit, we  were able to renegotiated with our supplier to give us a discount on the drives if the prices drop. In the event that market prices drop lower than our previous negotiated price, we will receive a discount. In turn, we will offer that same discount to backers who have added the drives to their pledges and refund the difference to you.” – Storaxa Update #17 HERE

Now, fair play to Storaxa. very few would have expected them to refund these savings. Mainly as the quantity of HDDs and SSDs would have likely been quoted and paid partially/fully at Distribution shortly after the closing of the Pledgebox. These are all still promises and considerations that are being outlined on a crowdfunding project that has still not (at the time of writing) shown details on money in/out on the media ordered, or final shipping devices. But this is nonetheless a positive stance to take in this update and one that I wanted to highlight in my updates.

Here is my round-up of the updates above (and a few of the April updates), all in one video. Enjoy!

June 2023 Storaxa NAS Updates

June saw three updates from Storaxa on the production of their system (the first larger than the two that followed, but all three addressed new information). The main subjects covered with the new intended Shipping Test, are fulfilment of the SD Card stretch goal (part of the shipping test), errors and issues encountered at production and planned tutorials and guides. There was also updated information on the GaN external Power Supplier, it’s a 19V supply with a 5.5*2.5 barrel jack in 140W/180W/200W depending on the chosen CPU (N6005/5825U/1235U,1256U).

“It is meant to plug directly into a power socket. It has a C6 socket, so you can also choose to use it like a power brick by using it with standard C5 cable. The power supply will only come with the plug suitable for your delivery location. After getting your feedback from the last update, we will include the C5 cable for your convenience.” – Storaxa Team, Update 19, June 7th 2023

Board for the 5825 CPU Storaxa NAS, Good and Bad News

The early June update started on a positive note, with the announcement that the production samples of the AMD 5825 controller board on their #20 update. This was a little soured for some by the additional note that the Intel board configuration systems had fallen behind schedule:

“We are proceeding with production now. However, the upgraded Intel main boards are behind schedule. By starting with two versions first, we can avoid delayed production overall. As long as the upgraded Intel board samples are ready within two weeks, we can stay on the delivery schedule for end of July.” – Storaxa Team, Update 20, June 7th 2023

Still, this was good news for those backers who had opted for one fo those AMD config choices. However, this was a little short-lived, when comments from the Storaxa group highlighted that they had hit a tech roadblock pertaining to the detection of the M.2 NVMe.

Twelve days later, in the June 19th Update, the Storaxa team highlighted that an issue was recognized in the AMD 5825 board:

“During testing of the AMD 5825 main board, the 4 top M.2 slots could not be read or detected. After further testing, we discovered that something went wrong during SMT and there was a problem with one of the resistors on the main board that affected the recognition of the ASM2812X chip PCB. We are fixing this now. This is not a big problem and it will be fixed in a week. Once it is complete, we can continue with testing and production.”– Storaxa Team, Update 20, June 7th 2023

Later in their final update of June, they did state that the SMT issue had been resolved:

“The AMD 5825 main board has finished SMT. The problem with the unrecognized ASM2812X chip has been fixed and testing and production can continue. The upgraded Intel versions can proceed after this.” – Storaxa Team, Update 21, June 30th 2023

The Storaxa SD Card Shipping Tests and System Recovery Images

In the early stages of the kickstart campaign, when alternative versions of the Storaxa configuration, rewards and stretch goals were being shared, one thing that was discussed was an SD card for every backer that contained the system recovery image (dependent on the OS choices across both elements of the system).

Although it became quickly clear that providing an ‘one for all’ system image for the SD card become untenable, they stated that they will provide the means to download these at launch, but use the SD cards for every backer as a means to test shipping:

“Since before our campaign started we tried our best to quote the lowest price for shipping to keep the price of Storaxa as low as possible. We didn’t give up that search even until after the campaign so we can keep the add-on and extra units shipping cost low too. We found a logistics company that quoted prices that we couldn’t believe. This would be very good for us because we can save some costs, but we didn’t think it was safe enough to entrust them with your rewards which ranges from hundreds to thousands of dollars. However, they assured us they have global coverage and can ensure the safe delivery of all rewards. To back up their proposal, they are willing to do a shipping test to show us they can handle all our orders.  Due to this, we are happy to announce we will conduct a shipping test by sending you the free 32GB microSD unlocked in the final stretch goal ahead of schedule. This test will show us the reliability of this new service and also serve as a practice run of fulfillment. We will start sending it out on June 15. It will take around 7 – 14 business days to be delivered. – Storaxa Team, Update 20, June 7th 2023

This still led to the question of less experienced users who wanted to have a recovery/initial-boot SD Card for this system, two of which Storaxa stated the following:

“We originally stated that the microSD card will come with a system recovery image for your Storaxa. However, after careful consideration, due to the fully customization feature of the Storaxa, no single image will fit everyone’s purposes. Therefore, we will send you a blank card so you can create the image right for you with the instructions below. (We will post the instructions again after you receive your Storaxas). We are starting to make the tutorial videos this week. We will film some demos to teach the basics on how to install and run the software for the Storaxa. The videos will be posted on our Youtube channel. We will start with some simple videos first and ask for your feedback before we move on to tutorials for the more advanced uses of Storaxa.” Storaxa Team, Update 21, June 19th 2023

Storaxa is stated to arrive with the system pre-installed and pre-configured, so you can plug in the network/power cables and drives, and start using it. Storaxa boots to Proxmox VE, which hosts 2 virtual machines, which respectively has TrueNAS-SCALE, and OpenWRT installed.

We cover this and more in our June Update video below:

July 2023 Storaxa NAS Updates

Right at the tail end of the month (31st July to be precise), Storaxa rolled out an update that was largely centered around 4 videos of the system (in a component-out state) being demo’d. The specifications for the unit and client machine they state are the testing system are:

  • AMD Board
  • 64GB Memory
  • 1TB Samsung 970 Pro Boot SSD
  • WiFi 6 Card (via an M.2 riser adapter card)
  • 10GbE (Via TB3 adapter)
  • 5x 16TB HDD (unconfirmed, but not hugely important for these tests)
  • 3x WD Black SN750 SSDs
  • Connected to Macbook Pro

The system board seemed to be connected via a standard multilane to SATA adapter, though I couldn’t quite 100% confirm the means that the 3x m.2 NVMe bays were connected (clear cable type there though). The testing Mac book was connected via a Thunderbolt3-to-10GbE adapter. The first test was a 10GbE transfer test (video here):

Next, there was a straightforward copy/paste into a RAIDZ1 (i.e comparable ZFS alternative to RAID 5). Video HERE, but result screen below:

Finally, there was a session of Plex testing, with three videos being streamed at once in H.265 and H.264. Again, the video is HERE.

Also, the Memory cards that formed one of the stretch goals from the initial Kickstarter campaign (more on that shortly) have started to arrive in Europe. The card from my pledge arrived on July 31st via Royal Mail, no signature was required but was trackable from Hong Kong onwards.

Rewinding back to the very start of the month, July started quiet – REAL quiet! In fact, it was unusually quiet times for Storaxa, with a period of over 2 weeks of Storaxa no longer responding to public comments or producing any updates. This was eventually addressed in the comments, backers section, on Reddit and more by concerned users who had noticed the sudden gear change.

That said, things seemingly returned to normal in the 2nd half of 2023, returning to a lot of those older comments, including my own (shown before/after), with apologies and highlights that a bigger update will be coming at the end of the month:

 

Backer SD Cards Arriving

Last month, Storaxa detailed that as a move to test shipping fulfilment in preparation for the eventual full Storaxa shipment and test the company shipping companies’ rather impressive delivery quotation, they would send backers their stretch goal included 32GB SSD Card (quote below from the June Update).

“We are starting the shipping test this week. Please expect to receive the package in 10 to 20 days. We will email you the tracking number through the PledgBox system within one week of sending out. This test will help us as a test run for when when we ship your Storaxas and also help us test the flexibility of shipping your rewards in different patches. We received mixed feedback about this test, but we feel this will help us to ensure you receive your rewards safely without additional costs.” Storaxa Team, Update 21, June 19th 2023

Cards began arriving in mid-July and it quickly became clear that these were being shipped by region/country/continent, with the U.S (likely the largest % of backers being located) being the first to state they had received the cards:

Additionally, some incredibly kind users (such as u/AkaiYui97 on Reddit, credit for images below), shared the contents of the Storaxa SD card delivery.

That said, not everyone (at the time of Writing, July 30th 2023) has received their SD card and it looks like Europe has been one of the last in the list of regions shipped to. Again, most likely a % based staged shipping method based on the locations of backers.

Now, on the face of it, we are talking about an SD card here… with an exceptionally low value. Although in itself a very low-value item, it’s worth remembering that these cards were shipped as a test of the shipping company and prospected fulfilment. Also, several users highlighted that the SD cards had tracking information indicating that they were received in Hong Kong in the last full week of July.

At the time of writing, the SD cards for the UK/Europe have started to be trackable and users might well see their cards arriving during the course of this week (31/07 – 4/08), as indicated by the tacking below.

Production and Shipment of Storaxa Now Delayed till September 2023

Another point worth touching on, and one that was certainly anticipated by many, was the officially stated delay of the Storaxa first fulfilment from 2nd Half of July to the 2nd Half of September. How this will impact users based on their configuration choice and global location is yet to be elaborated upon (there IS an update stated to arrive on July 31st, which might address this), but for now, the project is now slated for later in 2023. Not a huge surprise and not unusual for Kickstarter.

 

The final statement from Storaxa regarding the updated timeline was as follows:

“The production timeline is the same as last update. Mass production will begin in September and shipping will start in the second half of September. All major parts and components have been ordered and will arrive before that time. The case and chassis sample is arriving at the end of this week so we can show that to you soon too.”  – Storaxa Team, Update #24, 1st Aug

 

Aug/Sept 2023 Storaxa NAS Updates

In recent developments regarding the Storaxa NAS by Arrowtrack, a series of unexpected challenges have emerged, primarily involving financial delays and fund withholding by the payment processor, Stripe. As backers eagerly await the product’s release, Arrowtrack has been surprisingly transparent about the situation, providing updates on every facet from supplier negotiations to production adjustments. Here’s a quick breakdown of the key points from their latest updates.

Situation Affecting the Storaxa NAS by Arrowtrack (Updates #27 and #28 Summary)

  • Funds Withholding by Stripe:
    • After successfully raising funds on Kickstarter, Arrowtrack encountered issues with their payment processor, Stripe. Due to the sudden large transaction amount from their campaign, Stripe withheld a significant portion of their funds.
    • Initially, Stripe released only 50% of the funds after Arrowtrack provided all the necessary documents. The rest of the funds were expected to be released during production time.
    • Instead of releasing the funds as expected in June, Stripe extended the payout date to August 31.
    • Just a week after confirming that the funds would be released on time, Stripe decided to hold the funds for another 60 days (until November 7). The primary reason was a high rate of refunds, which triggered their system for a further review. Arrowtrack believed these refunds were due to backers changing their minds about options before the delivery date.
    • Stripe had previously disabled the chat function on Arrowtrack’s account dashboard, limiting their communication. In Update #28, this function was re-enabled, which Arrowtrack took as a positive sign.

  • Financial Details:
    • Kickstarter funds raised: $1,688,332.29.
    • Pledgebox funds: $950,257.09, with $982,864.57 being held by Stripe.
    • Deposit for mass production and ODM: $2,116,258 of $3,074,638.
    • Account Balance (as of Sept 4th): $480,874.
    • Arrowtrack has paid around 70% deposit for all manufacturing costs, including materials, parts, setup costs, and ODM/OEM costs. However, the current balance is insufficient for completing production.

  • Production and Delivery Delays:
    • The delays in Stripe’s payout affected Arrowtrack’s ability to maintain their original schedule.
    • Production was initially postponed until September, and after the latest delay, the shipping has been rescheduled to start in the second half of November.
  • Negotiations with Suppliers and Manufacturers:
    • Arrowtrack has been in negotiations to extend payment deadlines to ensure deposits aren’t forfeited.
    • In the wake of extreme weather conditions in southern China, meetings with some suppliers were postponed. Still, Arrowtrack managed to renegotiate with all but two suppliers for a 3-month extension on final payment.
    • Production of the upgraded Intel boards was paused due to payment uncertainties but is set to resume in two weeks.
  • Review Sample and Refunds:
    • There was a delay in sending out a review sample to NASCompares, but Arrowtrack hopes to use this time to gather feedback from the review.
    • Arrowtrack has received 20 refund requests so far and is appreciative of their backers’ patience and understanding.
  • General Backer Support:
    • Arrowtrack expressed deep gratitude to their backers for their understanding and support during this difficult time. They highlighted the importance of their backers’ continued faith in the project’s success.

Arrowtrack’s Storaxa NAS project faced significant challenges primarily due to Stripe withholding funds. This caused delays in production, requiring renegotiations with suppliers and adjustments in their delivery schedule. Despite these hurdles, the company remains committed to delivering the product, and backers have shown substantial support and understanding. Of course, we also need to remain grounded and remember that we are only seeing half the story here. Additionally, although Storaxa has been forthcoming with its updates, these updates and regular comments have reduced in frequency in the last few months. Additionally, lack of further documentation of suppliers being used, further communication with Stripe being shared, the recent update arriving later than stated and many users (myself included) reporting that these last two updates did not result in email notifications to users (yet all others did) – these are all matters that remain pertinent to many users following this campaign. These are mostly small potato arguments in the grand scheme of things, but it is important to remain as objective as possible. Users who have invested thousands of dollars towards the system in an upgraded state + storage media purchased now a considerable time ago might well be having understandably cold feet.

Reactions to the Storaxa’s updates on the issues with Stripe by the backers of the campaign were mostly positive, save for a few users highlighting that update #28 arrived late and that proactive email notifications appeared to be disabled (still unconfirmed, but certainly noted online). One user (@Ruan) did take the time to do a breakdown of the finances as stated and made efforts to highlight potential issues of finance in the numbers reported, but this had to be built on only partial by partial numbers related to finances and stock procured by Storaxa, and therefore open to error. Neverthless, even at a casual glance and only using the barebone numbers provided by the campaign creators, the margins do seem rather thin. I wanted to share it here (linked below, just click the image) as I think it’s worth keeping in mind about the scale of this project, once you factor in multiple base configurations and the storage upgrades that have been added:

The post examines the finances of the Storaxa Kickstarter NAS campaign in light of potential delays, as half of the funds are being held by the payment provider, Stripe.

  • The total funds raised on Kickstarter and PledgeBox combined is $3,621,444.95.
  • A deposit of $3,074,638.00 was made for mass production and ODM, leaving a balance of $546,806.95.
  • Using a breakdown of addons, including HDDs, NVMes, SSDs, and Samsung 980 Pro 2TB NVMes, the post calculates the total estimated addon cost at $537,600.
  • This leaves just $9,206.95 for global shipping of at least 5,000 packages, and other costs like SD cards, which is viewed as unrealistic.
  • Analyzing the base Storaxa unit costs, the post estimates that at least 8,000 units were necessary from the original pledge, and there may be a discrepancy in the number of additional units backed versus those being produced.
  • Three hypotheses are proposed:
    1. The creators got an exceptional deal on addons.
    2. The creators won’t profit and are primarily pushing their brand.
    3. More funds than expected were used for non-Storaxa addons, which might hinder the actual Storaxa product development.

The post concludes by asking for an update on the actual numbers of non-Storaxa Addons and clarity on why the production costs appear so high, emphasizing concerns about delivery costs. From the information provided, there are several points to consider:

  1. Funds Being Held: Storaxa mentioned that Stripe is holding onto 50% of the funds raised from the campaign. If this is accurate, it would indeed create a liquidity issue for the company.
  2. Discrepancy in Costs: Based on the post’s calculations, the funds left after accounting for production costs and the estimated addon costs appear insufficient to cover worldwide shipping of at least 5,000 packages, plus other ancillary costs. This raises concerns about whether all the promised items can be delivered without additional funding.
  3. Estimated Addon Costs: The calculations for the addon costs are based on minimum values, and as mentioned in the post, if backers ordered more than one of an item, these costs would rise. Moreover, the post speculates that many might have chosen higher-priced items, which would further strain the finances.
  4. Unit Discrepancy: The analysis suggests a potential discrepancy between the number of Storaxa units backed and those being produced, pointing to possible over-production or an underestimation of the number of units required.
  5. Three Hypotheses: The post’s hypotheses suggest that Storaxa either secured an incredibly good deal on addons, isn’t looking to profit and is pushing their brand, or has used more funds for non-Storaxa addons than projected, potentially hindering Storaxa product development. The validity of any of these hypotheses would significantly affect the interpretation of Storaxa’s financial situation.

The BIG takeaway here is that Storaxa will need to start engaging with its audience more regularly. There are many in the comments who would point out that this project has seen more updates than many other campaigns on the Kickstarter platform. However, we are still talking about a campaign with $1.8 Million raised in the initial campaign and a further $2 Million in pledge upgrades – these are bot atypical numbers for an average Kickstarter campaign on average (it happens, but most polished campaigns will live in the 5-6 figures in $). Given the reported change in work on their side related to negotiating with suppliers for later deadlines on payments and maintaining the project through this relative period of ‘hand-on’ inactivity, many would like to see higher engagement with their audience in the comments, further updates, tests/demonstrations in-house with the units that they have, further details of the communications with Stripe (share those conversations in greater details to well further refunds perhaps?) and just generally make their activity and presence felt more than it is. Kickstarter is NOT Amazon or eBay, but it does thing on communication and transparency, something that Storaxa was good on and now arguably becoming weaker on during this period of flux. As always, I will continue to follow this evolving crowdfunded NAS campaign.

Sept / Oct 2023 Storaxa NAS Updates

If I had to describe the Storaxa NAS Kickstater campaign throughout October and at the very start of November 2023 in one word, it would be….quiet! In updates the previous month (#27 and #28), the Storaxa group stated that production was not possible due to delays in finances arriving from the payment handler ‘Stripe’. Nevertheless, it did/does seem very quiet on storaxas side throughout all of this and no comments by backers were responded too and the update that was slated for October 12th ended up being late (with virtually no explanation or indication), leading to a lot of user debate about the health of the campaign, the validity of the Stripe funds statements and the information provided up to this point in the official campaign updates. Indeed, in terms of actual milestone events in the last calendar month, there was only really four to speak of. The first was the comment that Storaxa made in response to weeks of silence, which was as follows:

Again, the above comment was after weeks of silence and no replies from users. Equally, this was the only comment on the campaign by Storaxa in that time and although a lot of comments/responses followed, they did not engage with them. Questions surrounding the state of the campaign, further verification of the stripe matters, where the existing funds were being spent, further information on suppliers and more. At the same time as this, there was also the public zoom discussion that I had arranged with Storaxa NAS backers (posted several times on the comments thread, with one of the last ones HERE). It did seem rather coincidental that Storaxa had not been replying to users for an extended period of time, but opted to do so on the day of the public zoom with the post discussed above). This was an organized zoom discussion for backers of the Storaxa NAS Kickstarter campaign, organized by Robbie @ NASCompares. This is NOT an official zoom organized by/in conjunction with the Storaxa/Arrowtrack group. Below you can watch the full zoom call:

There is of course the question of why I did not just host a zoom with Storaxa/Arrowtrak instead, putting users’ questions directly to them? This was asked a few times and (as I discuss in the comment below), I HAD reached out to Storaxa previously for a zoom Q&A session, but they declined to reply.

When Sotraxa did reveal an official update (update #29), it was rather small and largely repeated similar to what the singular comment a few days before had said, but adding a pinch more on production and showing a change that was going to be implemented to the hardware design:

03:57:22 – Update Frequency 04:00:33 – Early Rewards and Address Changes 04:02:28 – Cat Issues 04:03:00 – Is the Storaxa AMD Module using an Aoostar Motherboard? 04:05:20 – Backer Zoom on Jan 30th 2024

The component change related to the internal cage, here:

Now, I AM pleased that they are providing more information! But as discussed in the video, there seems to be a lot of information that they could be supplying that could calm a lot of people’s concerns, yet for one reason or another do not. Such as:

  • Information about the existing orders they have with production suppliers (Pro forma invoices, names of the suppliers if possible, images of any hardware that has been delivered at all – and if not due to reasons of deposits/credit agreements needing conclusion, supply further information on this
  • More information on the back and forth with Stripe. More of the emails, more of the correspondence. Only 2 images have been shown regarding communication and have been cropped significantly
  • Further images on the existing hardware they have an how this new bay/cage component is better/worse than what was in the prototypes and AMD samples
  • Clarification on the sourcing and reasoning behind the design change, as many have raised question marks about it’s origin
  • Further clarification on how, if the stripe money holding will cease on Nov 7th, how production resuming on 13th Nov will happen so fast. it’s impact on fulfilment?

Finally, storaxa got in touch after Update #29 to state that they still wish to send a review prototype. Of course, I will continue to oblige with this, but nevertheless that campaign still moves forward with a lot of unanswered questions by backers and the current state of the campaign. If/when this unit arrives, I will let backers know and proceed with the original testing as discussed. I hope I have more positive news to share with you in the next update.

 

Unfortunately, at the time of writing this article (Jan 5th 2024), there has not been any further communication from the brand about this review unit, originally sent on 31st October 2023. 

December 2023 Update

Which leads to the December 2023 update. Sadly, very little has changed and is covered in greater detail i nthe video linked below (I have linked to the specific part, just click play. However, the TLDR is:

03:57:22Update Frequency – Storaxa assured users that they would maintain updates every 7-10 days, but then unfortunately only maintained this for a week and have now been largely silent since December 7th 2023 (29 Days since the date of this article’s publication)

04:00:33Early Rewards and Address Changes – Storaxa/Arrowtrak DID respond to users address change requests

04:03:00Is the Storaxa AMD Module using an Aoostar Motherboard? – There were questions being raised on Reddit regarding a very similar motherboard being used on the Aoostar NVMe NAS system and claims that the motherboard inside the Storaxa is the Aoostar model.

This is the system to which they are referring – LINK TO VIDEO

04:05:20Backer Zoom on Jan 30th 2024 – I/NASCompares have raised the idea of a backer zoom (not anyway officially endorsed by Stooraxa to discuss the campaign so far)

Video:


Why Did I Back the Storaxa NAS on Kickstarter? (IMPORTANT!!!!!)

Originally, I had no real intention of backing the Storaxa NAS Kickstarter project. As a long-time follower of channels such as Slope’s Game Room and his Kickscammer series, as well as only backing a tremendously small number of projects on the platform (and even then, for small sums comparatively) I have always had an especially sceptical mindset for alot of crowdfunding projects that have tremendously small profit margins early doors. Additionally, I was not in the market to buy a new NAS solution, as I cover plenty on my YouTube channel and (though contrary to popular belief, I rarely get to keep them and the ones that I do, go into channel content) I already have two personal servers up and running that I am in no rush to replace.

However, after I was contacted by several existing backers of this project and potential backers looking for a 2nd opinion, I started looking into the Storaxa a little more, contacting the organizers about a future review. After this point, a few different things happened. The campaign was nearing conclusion and more backers had been in touch that weekend to express further concern (alongside rising questions on the usual public forums, such as Reddit and STH). So, I made a video on the campaign, my initial impressions, my own questions about the price point vs distribution, and further questions surrounding heat dissipation. This resulted in my original message to the Storaxa group regarding reviews being screenshotted and shared to the comments section of the official page by the organizers themselves, with many points being highlighted (but not all) in my video being addressed.

The odd thing was that I never got a reply to that message personally, only hearing about this from other backers, who too thought the way it had been handled rather odd. So, I sent a follow-up message, with further questions, explaining my position, the methodology behind my video and my intentions in greater detail. The response came two days later, stating that I was playing media games and did not address my questions (stating that the answers were in the comments section – of which only 2/6 were, with 1 other in the backers only area and 3 others surrounding the team, Opensource distribution and production fulfilment waves not answered). Needless to say, I replied with my questions once again (with a few new points) and sadly have never received a reply to that one to date. So, why, after all that, did I back the project?

Now, one hurdle that is part kickstarter’s design and part campaign presentation choice is/was to do with how information is relayed to potential/existing backers. There needs to be a central framework that can be adapted to all projects of all types – there is no ‘one shape fits all’ campaign mould that can be used. This proved especially true when (at that time of writing) the comments section comprised around 2,000 comments (now at more than 6,000 – without a search function too!) and many comments were broken into sub-conversations (and the Kickstarter framework only allows X number loaded in), a long thread of hundreds of voices with the facts getting soon mixed with assumptions and contradiction in places, potentially leading to an echo chamber effect. Again, this is the framework that Kickstarter has for its central conversation thread and not the design of the project organizers. Nonetheless, this did lead to an issue. The bulk of the main information was published behind the main update section, which was set to only be visible to backers and shared videos for the project were made unlisted and shared with backers online.

At this point, I was intrigued enough by the campaign conclusion, the subject of OS-free NAS solutions rolling out from the east more and more, keen to see if/how it could deliver, as well s wanting to ensure an element of accountability and reference for the future. So, I decided to back the project in order to update users on the progress of this unusual NAS regularly. What follows are my monthly updates on the Storaxa Kickstarter NAS. Starting with that initial video from February 6th 2023 and with information, screen grabs and important milestones/changes in the campaign as time moves on. Hopefully, this article will end with high-order fulfilment, everyone getting their Storaxa system, a new kind of NAS solution entering the market and this growing 3rd choice between the Turnkey solutions and full DiY Opensource builds getting bigger and better, but we will have to wait till Summer 2023 to find out. 

Note – I have broken all the information below into monthly chunks (with the 2x Feb chunks being an exception, as the campaign concluded at the end of that month and a volley of updates happened at the end). I am writing the February coverage retroactively, so I apologise in advance if my tenses on some parts are incorrect. I did not even realise at that time that I would be making this article and therefore, it’s been a case of catching up with myself! Additionally, I am composing this with the most recent information FIRST (eg months in reverse order), and updating it each month, so those following this article can get notifications about the updates with the Storaxa NAS summarized. Alternatively, you can browse the comments section HERE or if you are a backer, use the page’s own official updates HERE.

 

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 
Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

If you like this service, please consider supporting us.
We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you. Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which is used to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H. You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks! To find out more about how to support this advice service check HERE   If you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver   Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
     

Phison Max14um Gen5 SSD Review and Benchmarks

Par : Rob Andrews
10 janvier 2024 à 10:35

Review of the Phison E26 Max14um Gen 5 SSD – New King Crowned?

The Phison E26 Controller equipped Max14um SSD is currently on display at the Consumer Electronics Show (CES) 2024, where it’s a part of Phison’s exhibit showcasing their latest advancements in solid-state drive technology. Prior to its demonstration at CES, a unit of the Max14um SSD was provided in advance for the purpose of an in-depth review and benchmarking analysis. This review will delve into the hardware specifications of the Max14um SSD, examining the components and design choices that underpin its performance. A key focus will be on the SSD’s unique heatsink, an essential feature given the drive’s high-speed capabilities and the thermal challenges associated with such performance levels. Benchmarking results from a suite of tests, including ATTO, AS SSD, CrystalDiskMark, and AJA, will be presented to quantify the drive’s performance across various scenarios. These tests are designed to push the SSD to its limits and provide a comprehensive understanding of its capabilities in both sequential and random data handling tasks. The findings aim to offer a detailed perspective on how the Max14um SSD stands in the current market, particularly in comparison to its contemporaries.

Note – Video Review of the Phison Max14um SSD on YouTube HERE (Live Later today)

Specification Phison E26 Max14um 2TB Phison E26 Max14um 4TB
Form Factor M.2 2280 M.2 2280
Interface/Protocol PCIe 5.0 x4 / NVMe 2.0 PCIe 5.0 x4 / NVMe 2.0
Controller Phison PS5026-E26 Phison PS5026-E26
DRAM LPDDR4 LPDDR4
NV Memory Micron 2400MT 232L TLC Micron 2400MT 232L TLC
Sequential Read Up to 14,600 MB/s Up to 14,600 MB/s
Sequential Write Up to 12,700 MB/s Up to 12,700 MB/s
Random Read Up to 1,500,000 IOPS Up to 1,500,000 IOPS
Random Write Up to 1,600,000 IOPS Up to 1,600,000 IOPS
Controller Tech Dual-CPU, Arm Cortex-R5, TSMC 12nm Dual-CPU, Arm Cortex-R5, TSMC 12nm
Flash Channels Up to 8 channels, 32 CE Up to 8 channels, 32 CE
Max Flash Transfer Rate Up to 2,400MT/s Up to 2,400MT/s
Security AES 256, SHA 512, RSA 4096, TCG Opal AES 256, SHA 512, RSA 4096, TCG Opal
Temperature Range Operating: 0–70°C, Storage: -40–85°C Operating: 0–70°C, Storage: -40–85°C

Phison E26 Max14um Gen 5 SSD Review – Quick Conclusion

In summarizing the capabilities of the Max14um SSD, it’s clear that this drive is a formidable presence in the Gen5 market, setting a new standard for speed and performance. The inclusion of 2400MT/s B58R NAND allows the SSD to fully capitalize on its potential, with the sophisticated cooling solution ensuring that this performance is sustainable over time. The compact form factor of the Max14um SSD is notably impressive, given its proximity to the bandwidth ceiling of Gen 5×4. The support and backing by Phison add a layer of reliability and assurance for the end-user. Additionally, the prospect of a 4TB model caters to the growing demand for high-capacity, fast storage solutions. However, the excellence of the Max14um SSD comes at a price, which is expected to reflect its high-end specifications and performance. Durability ratings, while not yet specified, are projected to be on par with industry averages, potentially around 0.3-0.38 DWPD. It’s important to note the cooling system’s reliance on a 4-pin CPU fan connector, which may not suit all users’ configurations, as it cannot draw power from the M.2 slot or a standard SATA/molex connection. Moreover, the drive’s ability to maintain its peak performance consistently will depend heavily on the specific client system in which it is installed.

BUILD QUALITY - 10/10
HARDWARE - 10/10
PERFORMANCE - 10/10
PRICE - 7/10
VALUE - 8/10


9.0
PROS
👍🏻Fastest available Gen5 drive
👍🏻Exceptional heatsink and cooling performance
👍🏻Allows full utilization of 2400MT/s B58R NAND
👍🏻Compact design despite high Gen 5 performance
👍🏻4TB option will be available
👍🏻Full backing by Phison
👍🏻Approaches the limits of Gen 5x4 bandwidth
CONS
👎🏻High cost is anticipated
👎🏻Durability ratings are average and not yet specified
👎🏻Cooling relies on a 4-pin CPU fan connector, not M.2 or SATA/molex powered
👎🏻Performance sustainability over time may vary based on client setup


Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?


These Offers are Checked Daily

 


 

Phison E26 Max14um Gen 5 SSD Review – PCB Chip Layout and Design

The Max14um SSD, equipped with the Phison E26 controller, stands out in the realm of Gen 5 SSDs primarily due to its adoption of Micron’s B58R NAND flash, which operates at 2400MT/s. This specification is a significant step up from the 1600MT/s speeds that are prevalent among other Gen 5 drives currently on the market till now. The higher transfer rate of the NAND directly contributes to the increased performance of the SSD, allowing it to handle larger volumes of data more efficiently and resulting in the elevated sequential read and write speeds observed in this model.

The Phison E26 controller itself is a pivotal component, designed to leverage the full potential of the high-speed NAND. It employs a dual-CPU configuration with Arm Cortex-R5 cores and is fabricated using a 12nm process technology. This setup enables the controller to manage the data flow across up to 8 channels with 32 chip enables (CE), which is instrumental in achieving the SSD’s top-tier performance metrics.

Additionally, the Max14um SSD integrates LPDDR4 DRAM, enhancing the controller’s ability to handle the I/O operations effectively. This integration is vital for maintaining the drive’s swift response times and managing the NAND’s high-speed transfers without bottlenecking the system. As a consequence, this design choice facilitates the drive’s capability to reach and sustain its peak performance.

The operational parameters of the Max14um SSD, such as its operating temperature range and power management features, are aligned with the industry standards for high-performance drives. The SSD’s compliance with stringent security protocols, including AES 256 and TCG Opal, without affecting its throughput, reflects a well-rounded approach to design that considers not just performance but also reliability and data security.

The Max14um SSD’s thermal management is integral to its design, particularly notable given the drive’s performance during intensive benchmarking. Even when subjected to the rigorous demands of ATTO and CrystalDiskMark tests, the SSD maintained exceptionally low operating temperatures. This is a testament to the effectiveness of the included heatsink, which has been meticulously engineered to handle the thermal output of the drive under heavy loads.

The heatsink that accompanies the Max14um SSD is slightly taller than those found on alternative SSDs such as the ADATA 970 Legend or the Seagate FireCuda 540. However, this increase in height is marginal and carefully calculated, ensuring that while it provides superior cooling capabilities, it does not significantly impact the overall form factor or the ease of installation in space-constrained environments.

In comparison to other high-performance SSDs on the market, such as the Nextorage Gen 5 drive and the Gigabyte Gen5 Aorus SSD, the Max14um’s heatsink is significantly less obtrusive. These competing drives opt for much taller heatsinks to accommodate their thermal dissipation needs, which can sometimes lead to compatibility issues with certain hardware configurations or enclosures. The Max14um strikes a balance between efficient cooling and compactness, avoiding the potential pitfalls of larger cooling solutions.

The result is a cooling system that is both effective and unassuming, allowing the Max14um SSD to deliver its robust performance without the need for an overly bulky or cumbersome heatsink. This thoughtful approach to design ensures compatibility with a wide range of hardware setups, maintaining the Max14um’s position as a versatile and user-friendly option in the high-speed SSD market.

Phison E26 Max14um Gen 5 SSD Review – Performance & Benchmarks

Performance benchmarks for the Phison E26 Max14um SSD were conducted on a midrange PC rig, in a Windows environment, with the Phison E26 Max14um used as an additional drive. The OS drive was a simple SATA SSD. Depending on the test results, a 2nd round of testing will be conducted on a higher tier Gen4 SSD OS test machine, but for now this arguably more domestic test rig was used in order to better represent an average PC user. The full machine test setup was:

  • Windows 10 Pro (SATA OS Drive, Seagate Firecuda 125)
  • ASUS Intel Z690 ROG MAXIMUS HERO Motherboard
  • 12th Gen Intel i5-12600K 3.7Ghz (4.9Ghz Burst) 10 Core (6P + 4E)
  • 16GB DDR5 4800Mhz Memory (1x16GB)
  • No GFX Card (though CPU has Intel UHD Graphics 770 iGPU)
  • Intel® UHD Graphics 770
  • Phison E26 Max14um 1TB SSD in PCIe 5×4 M.2 Slot


Phison E26 Max14um SSD CrystalDiskMark Tests

The first tests were favoured towards Sequential (big, blocky and in-line) performance, using CrystalDiskMark on the Phison E26 Max14um, on 1GB, 4GB and 16GB Test Files. First up, the 1GB File:

Next up, the 4GB CrystalDiskMark Phison E26 Max14um Test:

Then, a much more dense 16GB File test

Finally, the largest 64GB CrystalDiskMark Phison E26 Max14um Test:


Phison E26 Max14um SSD ATTO Disk Benchmark Tests

The next tests on the Phison E26 Max14um SSD were conducted with Atto Diskbenchmark, once again at three file size types (256MB, 1GB and 4GB). Atto Disk Benchmark has a slight difference in GB calculation to CrystalDiskMark, so do not be alarmed by the slight difference in stats. We looked at the Sequential Performance and the reported IOPS. First up is the 256MB Test File

Next up for the Phison E26 Max14um SSD was a larger round of 1GB tests:

Finally, the 4GB Test file. This was also the area when the SSD reached it’s highest temperature (mentioned earlier)


Phison E26 Max14um SSD AS SSD Tests

Next up was an arguably more SSD-focused test, this time with AS SSD on the Phison E26 Max14um SSD. Again, much like the other test flows, AS SSD has it’s own metrics, so cannot be directly compared against ATTO and CrystalDisk directly. The first test was using the 1GB Test file:

Next Phison E26 Max14um AS SSD test was a 3GB test file:

Finally, there was the larger 5GB test file.

Tests for all three AS SSD benchmarks were pretty comparable.


Phison E26 Max14um Gen 5 SSD Review – Conclusion and Verdict

In conclusion, the Max14um SSD sets a new benchmark for Gen5 SSDs with its exceptional performance and efficient thermal management. It stands out as the fastest drive currently available in its category, a testament to the synergy between its cutting-edge 2400MT/s B58R NAND and the Phison E26 controller. The heatsink design deserves special mention for its capability to maintain optimal temperatures without bulking up the device, ensuring that the high-speed components can operate without thermal throttling. Despite its impressive speeds and cooling system, the drive’s size remains surprisingly compact, particularly when considering its performance metrics that are close to saturating the Gen 5×4 bandwidth. Furthermore, the upcoming availability of a 4TB option adds to its appeal for users seeking high-capacity, high-performance storage solutions. The backing by Phison, not just in terms of the controller but the entire drive, provides a level of assurance in terms of quality and support.

However, potential buyers should be aware of the expected high cost of the drive, which could be a significant factor in purchase decisions. Additionally, while the exact durability ratings (DWPD/TBW) are yet to be disclosed, they are anticipated to be average for high-end SSDs. The requirement of a 4-pin CPU fan connector for cooling may pose a compatibility issue for certain setups, as the fan is not powered directly by the M.2 interface or through SATA/molex power. It’s also important to note that the sustained performance of 14/12GB is contingent upon the client’s environment and workload.

Phison E26 Max14um SSD

Phison E26 Max14um SSD PROS Phison E26 Max14um SSD CONS
  • Fastest available Gen5 drive
  • Exceptional heatsink and cooling performance
  • Allows full utilization of 2400MT/s B58R NAND
  • Compact design despite high Gen 5 performance
  • 4TB option will be available
  • Full backing by Phison
  • Approaches the limits of Gen 5×4 bandwidth
  • High cost is anticipated
  • Durability ratings are average and not yet specified
  • Cooling relies on a 4-pin CPU fan connector, not M.2 or SATA/molex powered
  • Performance sustainability over time may vary based on client setup
If you are thinking of buying storage, please use the links below as it results in us at NASCompares receiving an affiliate fee from Amazon:

Need More Help Choosing the Right Storage Solution?

Choosing the right data storage solution for your needs can be very intimidating and it’s never too late to ask for help. With options ranging from NAS to DAS, Thunderbolt to SAS and connecting everything up so you can access all your lovely data at the touch of a button can be a lot simpler than you think. If you want some tips, guidance or help with everything from compatibility to suitability of a solution for you, why not drop me a message below and I will get back to you as soon as possible with what you should go for, its suitability and the best place to get it. This service is designed without profit in mind and in order to help you with your data storage needs, so I will try to answer your questions as soon as possible.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

The Samsung 990 EVO Gen5 SSD Revealed

Par : Rob Andrews
12 janvier 2024 à 18:00

Samsung Finally Releasing a Consumer Gen5 SSD – The 990 EVO M.2 NVMe SSD

With so many Gen 5 SSDs being revealed during CES 2024, it probably won’t come as a tremendous surprise that Samsung (a big [player in both the consumer and business SSD market) is on the verge of rolling out its very first consumer-focused PCIe Gen 5M.2 NVMe SSD – The Samsung 990 EVO.

As surprising as it might sound, although home/consumer Gen 5 SSDs have been rolling out for the better part of 2 years, Samsung held off rolling out their own till now. That isn’t to say that they have ignored this area of the market, though all attention from them towards Gen5 storage has been exclusively enterprise-focused (eg the PM1743 Flash), but many were surprised how long it was taking them to enter the growing Gen5 SSD marketplace. Rewind back to the Samsung 980 Pro Gen 4 launch in Nov 2020, wiping practically every other Gen4 drive off the map at that time in terms of performance, and you can see why users have been rather perplexed on Samsung’s reluctance this time around. However, better late than never, right? Thank you numerous leaks online spotted by ComputerBase.de, which ranged from the Samsung Magician tool leaking the 990 EVO product name, and to references on the PCISiG here.

Source – ComputerBase

Then there was an appearance (albeit briefly) of the official product being listed on official UA Samsung pages, although now largely just resulting in a blank search result (see below). Finally, it appeared on Amazon Germany, at €115 and €190 for the 1TB and 2TB models respectively (both now taken offline) which listed delivery as the 25th of Jan and 24th of February – so clearly we are looking at drives that are pretty much imminent for official launch!

So, now we know the Samsung 990 EVO exists – should you care? With so, so many Gen5 SSDs being released or revealed in Q1 2024, have Samsung left this a little too late? Let’s discuss the specifications we know about.

The Samsung 990 EVO SSD Hardware Specifications

I think it would be an understatement to say that Samsung have “gone their own way” when it comes to the Samsung 990 EVO SSD. As mentioned earlier, they have certainly approached it differently to the Gen4 generation of SSDs where they took a early massive lead across the whole market with the (still popular) Samsung 980 PRO.The hardware specifications of the Samsung 990 EVO are…unusual, in a conventional sense. Samsung has clearly decided that the Samsung 990 EVO is a drive targeting the bridging between Gen4 and Gen5 users, as well as low power use and economical SSD buyers. In short, this drive is not designed with performance in mind – which is going to sound rather unusual, given that is the focus of 99% of the rest of Gen5 SSDs launched in the last 18 months. The Samsung 990 EVO is a Dramless (i.e no onboard memory/DRAM) that can be used on a Gen 4 connection to 4×4 bandwidth or a Gen5 connection at 5×2. The result is that this more economical and efficiency-focused drive peaks at 5,200MB/s (5.2GB/s) Sequential Read and 4,200MB/s (4.2GB/s) Sequential Write. This rather pales in comparison to the Gen 4×4 Samsung 990 PRO at 7,450MB/s and 6,900MB/s Seq Read/Write respectively. This lower peak performance also extends to the 4K Random IOPS at 700K/800K Read//Write respectively on the 990 EVO vs the 1.5Million and 1.6Million 4K R/W IOPS of the 990 PRO. Alot of these shortfalls can be attributed to the lack of onboard memory (with the drive relying on using a portion of host client memory, aka HMB) and the PCIe Gen 5×2 architecture – but the drive hitting these numbers in a 4×4 environment is a little disappointing (even when you consider the efficiency focus that this drive has been built under). Here are the specs:

The following specifications are based on the above-leaked information from ComputerBase, cached pages that are now offline and using specifications of similar OEM PM9C1a SSD that shares many similarities with the Samsung 990 EVO SSD:

Model Samsung SSD 990 EVO
Interface PCIe 4.0 x4 / 5.0 x2 NVMe 2.0
Capacity 1TB, 2TB (Possible 4TB)
Controller Samsung in-house Controller
NAND Flash Memory Samsung V-NAND TLC (176-layer TLC V-NAND V7 ? TBC
Memory HMB (Host Memory Buffer)
Form Factor M.2 (2280)
Sequential Read Up to 5,000MB/s
Sequential Write Up to 4,200MB/s 
4K IOPS Random Read 680KIOPS (1TB), 700KIOPS (2TB) (TBC)
4K IOPS Random Write 800KIOPS (TBC)
MTBF 1.5 million hours
Warranty 5 years limited, TBW: 600TB (1TB), 1,200TB (2TB) (TBC)
Supporting Features TRIM, Garbage Collection, S.M.A.R.T
Data Security AES 256-bit Full Disk Encryption, TCG/Opal V2.0, Encrypted Drive (IEEE1667)

The Samsung 990 EVO is PCIe Gen 5×2 – Wait, What?

So, let’s drill into that 5×2 / 4×4 architecture a little and look at the positives. On the face of it, technically ALL Gen5  SSDs can work at 4×4 if placed in a 4×4 M.2 slot – that is the nature of PCIe backwards compatibility. However, if you place a Gen4 drive in a Gen5 m.2 slot, you will be downgraded to Gen4 speeds (no different than a USB 2.0 device in a USB 3.2 connector). The Samsung 990 EVO allows this 4×4 drive to enjoy 5×2 speeds in devices with carefully curated PCIe lane layouts or PCIe cards that have to be very selective about the allocation (i.e RAID cards of combo storage/network cards). Additionally, in devices such as ultra-thin laptops and compact mini PCs, heat is a real concern and 5×4 architecture will noticeably reduce power consumption and lessen the need for comprehensive heat dissipation.

However, we also have to look at this objectively and as a new buyer considering a Gen 5 SSD in 2024, and in that context the Samsugn 990 EVO is a rather odd proposition. First, there is the fact that this drive seemingly under performs compared with the majority of Gen 4 SSDs released in the last 4 years (many of which carry at minimum 5,500MB/s Seq Read performance and most now surpassing 7,000MB/s). Even if you make a direct comparison with a DRAMless Gen4 SSD that relies on Host Memory Buffer released back in 2022, such as the WD Black SN700 (currently at $75 for 1TB and $119 for 2TB), that drive still hits 5,150MB/s and 4,850MB/s Seq R/W and 650/800K IOPS – which is VERY close to what the 2024 releasing Samsung 990 EVO is proposing here. It’s an odd choice to make their first consumer(ish?) focused M.2 SSD for the Gen5 tier a Gen 5×2 drive and DRAMless, as these are the sort of specifications I expect in a more specialized/OEM drive that likely goes directly in a laptop at production or in bulk in a more PCI curated RAID card. Gen 5×2 is by no means a common m.2 bandwidth allocation and although many system allow customization at BIOS/Chipset for efficiency, most Gen5 buyers are looking at this generation with performance as the driving motivator. We are still awaiting confirmation on details such as durability (DWPD/TBW), but one imagines that with such a focus on efficiency and power consumption savings, that durability on this drive will be welcomingly high! Lets drill down a little into the choice to go ‘RAM free’ on the Samsung 990 EVO Gen5 SSD.

The Samsung 990 EVO is DRAMless – Why?

Much like the choice by Samsung to opt for the Gen 5×2 architecture, there are pros and cons to this kind fo drive that are going to result in it being a much more specialized drive than many would like.  DRAMless SSDs, like the Samsung 990 EVO, represent a significant evolution in solid-state drive technology. The primary advantage of DRAMless SSDs is their cost-effectiveness. By eliminating the DRAM cache, these SSDs reduce manufacturing costs, making them more affordable for consumers. This is particularly beneficial for those who require high-capacity storage but are constrained by budget. Additionally, DRAMless SSDs tend to consume less power, as they don’t have to power a separate DRAM module. This lower power consumption makes them an ideal choice for use in laptops and mobile devices, where battery life is a crucial factor. The Samsung 990 EVO leverages Host Memory Buffer (HMB) technology, which uses a portion of the system’s RAM instead of having its own dedicated DRAM. This approach can maintain a balance between performance and cost, offering decent speeds that are suitable for everyday use and mainstream applications.

However, the absence of a dedicated DRAM cache in DRAMless SSDs can also lead to certain drawbacks. The most significant of these is the potential reduction in performance, especially in write-intensive scenarios or when handling large files. DRAM in traditional SSDs acts as a high-speed buffer for the mapping table, which keeps track of where data is stored on the drive. Without this, the SSD has to rely on slower NAND or the system’s RAM (as in HMB technology) for these operations, which can result in slower write speeds and increased latency. For the Samsung 990 EVO, this might not be a significant issue for average users, but for professionals and enthusiasts who require high-performance storage for tasks like video editing, gaming, or heavy data processing, the difference could be noticeable. Additionally, depending on the implementation, relying on the system’s RAM (as in HMB) can affect the overall system performance, especially in RAM-constrained systems.

Samsung 990 EVO Release Date and Price

There is no avoiding that the Samsung 990 EVO SDD is not a drive that is going to please everyone. There is an ongoing discussion right now on whether client hardware (laptops, servers, PCs, etc) can actually fully take advantage of the performance of Gen 5 SSDs in a sustained fashion. Affording PCIe Gen5 lanes to the SSDs is only half the battle, as the drive still needs to be able to provide the throughput and response times from the onboard NAND flash to the host system. Gen5 SSDs have been promising 12-14GB/s speeds now for around 6-8 months, but how long they can sustain that speed before oversaturation and/or heat-related throttling is up for debate. The Samsung 990 EVO is clearly a drive with a different focus and one that, in the right circumstances, makes a lot of sense. However, as a first-release by the brand in the commercial sector for Gen5, it’s an odd choice and I sincerely hope it is one that is speedily followed up (and/or dual-released alongside) a more confident Prosumer version (Samsung 1000 PRO? Samsung 990 Pro Plus?), as this si quite a niche sounding drive. Expect it to formally launch later in Jan 2024 and pricing at $119 and $199 for the 1TB and 2TB models respectively.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS Review

Par : Rob Andrews
22 janvier 2024 à 15:00

TerraMaster F4-424 Pro NAS Review

We talk about NAS a lot here on NASCompares, and when we discuss ‘value’ and ‘affordable’ servers, more often than not, we will be discussing a TerraMaster NAS system. Long regarded as the more affordable end of the private server market, they have nevertheless come a considerably long way in a comparatively short time when compared to the ‘bigger players in the playground,’ such as Synology and QNAP. Indeed, the subject of today’s review, the TerraMaster F4-424 Pro, is perhaps one of the most powerful 4-Bay turnkey NAS systems on the market! This, alongside their NAS software closing the gap in a few key areas with their competitors (flexible RAID storage that allows mixed drive deployment, BTRFS, a Surveillance platform in beta, and their own AI photo recognition application leaving beta, to name but a few), has resulted in a decent percentage of the NAS buyer market starting to take the plucky TerraMaster NAS brand more seriously. Throw into the mix that this Intel i3 N300, 32GB DDR5, NVMe slot-equipped, 2x 2.5GbE-connected system is rolling out the gate at under $699, and you have a serious contender of a system here! But, all that rhetoric and spec jargon aside, is it any good? Let’s find out in today’s review.

TerraMaster F4-424 Pro NAS Review – Quick Conclusion

The TerraMaster F4-424 Pro NAS is a powerful 4-bay system with an Intel i3 N300 CPU, 32GB DDR5 memory, and 2x M.2 NVMe SSD bays, offering impressive performance for tasks like Plex media streaming and transcoding. Its redesigned chassis, resembling Synology and QNAP models, improves cooling and accessibility, marking a significant design upgrade. TOS 5 software enhances GUI clarity, backup tools, storage options, and security. The absence of 10GbE and memory limitations are notable drawbacks. Nevertheless, it offers great value in the 4-bay NAS market, appealing to budget-conscious users seeking capable private server solutions.

SOFTWARE - 7/10
HARDWARE - 8/10
PERFORMANCE - 9/10
PRICE - 10/10
VALUE - 10/10


8.8
PROS
👍🏻Powerful Hardware:** Equipped with an Intel i3 N300 CPU and 32GB DDR5 memory, delivering robust performance.
👍🏻Redesigned Chassis:** Improved design for better cooling, hot-swapping, and internal accessibility.
👍🏻TOS 5 Software:** TerraMaster\'s TOS 5 software offers a clear GUI, enhanced backup tools, expanded storage options, and improved security features.
👍🏻Affordable Price:** Competitive pricing under $699 makes it an attractive option for its hardware and software capabilities.
👍🏻Flexible RAID Support:** Supports various RAID configurations, including TRAID for flexible disk array setup.
👍🏻Multiple Client Sync:** TerraSync tool efficiently synchronizes data across multiple users and devices.
👍🏻CCTV Surveillance:** Surveillance Manager offers video recording and monitoring features for added security.
👍🏻AI Photo Recognition:** Terra Photos uses AI algorithms to classify and manage photos effectively.
CONS
👎🏻No 10GbE Support:** Lacks 10GbE support, potentially limiting network speed for some users.
👎🏻Memory Over-specification:** The inclusion of 32GB memory may raise concerns, given the CPU\'s maximum support of 16GB.
👎🏻Limited Packaging Quality:** Packaging and presentation are basic and may not match the standards of competitors.


Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS Review – Packaging and Presentation

The Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS arrives in a somewhat bland brown cardboard box, with little to no information about the product on it. This might not come as a surprise, considering that this is primarily an eShop purchase, and the emphasis is more on the product’s performance and features rather than the packaging’s visual appeal.

The internal packaging consists of a foam framework designed to secure the system during transit, which, while functional, feels a bit flimsy. The outer cardboard box is single-layered and doesn’t exude a premium feel. In their defense, Terramaster products are known for offering significant cost savings, often being 20% cheaper or more compared to similar products in the market with similar hardware specifications. Therefore, cost-effective packaging choices like these can be somewhat expected. The accessories that come with the F4-424 are neatly packed in their own cardboard box and include standard items such as a network cable, an external PSU, screws for 2.5″ drives (as the 3.5″ drives are held in screwless trays within the system), drive media stickers (which are rarely used), a screwdriver, and warranty information. However, it’s worth noting that the F4-424 comes with a 2-year warranty, which may disappoint some users when larger brands like Synology and QNAP offer 3-year warranties.

While one can argue that the shorter hardware warranty is a result of cost-cutting measures to maintain an affordable price point, it does feel somewhat limited given the high-quality hardware within this compact system. The external PSU provided is a 3rd-party, unbranded 90W PSU, which is standard for many 4-Bay systems in this category. In summary, the packaging and presentation of the Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS are generally unremarkable. While cost-saving measures are evident in the packaging materials and the warranty duration, they are somewhat justified by the product’s competitive pricing and robust hardware.

Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS Review – Design

The F4-424 Pro arrives with a complete design overhaul in comparison to other 4-Bays released by the brand in the last decade. The previous 4-Bay chassis design had been looking rather dated for longer than many would have liked, as well as featuring a much more closed cooling system and awkward disassembly when assessing upgradable components such as M.2 NVMe slots and RAM slots.

The F4-424 arrives with a smaller but more curved chassis that massively improves passive cooling, hot swapping, and accessing the internal motherboard on the fly. The side panels have now got ventilated ‘Terramaster’ logos, as well as the base of the system have better-placed ventilation points.

Indeed, the rear active cooling has improved vastly over the chunky twin fan block of the previous design and is now a single internally placed 120mm fan that creates a much sleeker look. The new Terramaster chassis in the F4-424 Pro is highly comparable to the likes of the Synology Diskstation 4-Bay series – both in ventilation placement and in color/material, arriving in brush matte black plastic.

The system now features improved click and load SATA media bays, though the means to eject them is at the top and not the bottom, which feels a little counterintuitive. Each tray used removable click and hold panels that hold 3.5” media drives in place (as well as screw holes for 2.5” media), with each tray neatly guiding into combined SATA and DATA connectors internally.

The system storage software also allows users to mix and match storage drive capacities, which may sound crazy on day 1, however if you were to deploy the system with 1-2 drives at the start and years later want to add more drives of a larger capacity, the Terramaster TRAID system will utilize the large capacity available in a way that regular RAID configurations such as RAID 5 would not. Again, TRAID could be compared against the Synology Hybrid RAID configuration which does the same thing, as well as both supporting BTRFS or EXT4 as the system system of choice.

The front of the system has some discreet LEDs that denote storage, system, and network health and activity, however they are perhaps a little TOO discreet and although I could increase the brightness, they were very small! Also, while they are clearly being inspired by their competitors in a number of ways for the design of the F4-424 Pro, the fact the system lacks a front-mounted USB port for convenient external storage or peripheral use is a bit of a shame. Overall, the design is very appealing and a massive improvement over practically ALL other desktop NAS systems to date.

Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS Review – Ports and Connections

The ports and connectivity of the F4-424 Pro present a mixed bag, and while nothing is particularly bad, there are some omissions that might irk the hardcore network users. The system comes equipped with 2x 2.5GbE network connectivity, and it also supports USB to 2.5GbE network adapters, offering a maximum network throughput of at least 279MB/s on a single port. This can be significantly increased by bonding them with features like LAG, Trunking, SMB Multi, and more, especially when using USB adapters and the right storage media.

However, considering the ‘PRO’ naming convention, the fact that this system is available in a non-pro version with a lesser processor but the same ports, and the price tag, there will be users disappointed by the absence of 10GbE support. Other systems with similar hardware and architecture have addressed this by including a PCIe upgrade slot through creative allocation of PCIe lanes internally. The F4-424 Pro’s lack of 10GbE or the means to add it later might be a sore point for some users.

The rear USB ports consist of both USB 3.2 Gen 2 10GbE type A and C slots, in addition to supporting USB storage drives, which can be configured in several ways for intelligent backups with the TOS software. These ports can also be assigned to virtual machine environments using the supported VirtualBox app. The HDMI port is 2.0b and supports up to 4K at 60FPS. However, Terramaster has yet to introduce any HDMI parallel GUI platform (similar to Asustor Portal or QNAP HD Station) that would enable an independent local GUI for a KVM setup.

Nonetheless, you can use the HDMI port if you wish to install a third-party NAS OS like TrueNAS or UnRAID, although this may limit the brand’s future warranty support in such cases. In summary, the ports and connections on the F4-424 Pro offer a mix of functionality, and while they are not subpar, the absence of 10GbE or the potential for future scalability to this speed may be a dealbreaker for some users.

Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS Review – Internal Hardware

Opening up the side panel of the F4-424 PRO is significantly easier than previous releases from the brand in the 4 bay tier and just requires the removal of 2 screws, then simply slides off. This reveals the main controller board of the F4-424, the passive CPU cooler/heatsink covered N300, single memory upgrade slot and the 2x M.2 NVMe SSD bays.

The F4-424 Pro benefits from the continued miniaturization and power efficiency scaling of popular CPUs from Intel and AMD towards smaller mobile revisions. This is also further caused by the recent retirement of the Intel Celeron, Pentium, and some Core processor naming by Intel on their newest releases, merging these families into newer N100, N95, and N300 revisions for 2023/2024.

The N300 inside the F4-424 is an i3 8-Core Processor, with 8 threads, low base frequency with an aggressive boost when needed and an impressively powered integrated graphics component too. In Plex testing, the F4-424 did very well indeed and played pretty much everything we threw at it (even some introductory 8K media) in both native playback and with hardware transcoding enabled.

The extent to which the TOS NAS software is able to fully utilize the i3-N300 CPU is debatable, as that becomes a matter of software efficiency, and that is something that brands need to spend huge percentages of their R&D budget on to achieve – and remember that the F4-424 Pro is still comparatively economical in its pricing.

The system arrives with 32GB of DDR5 memory, which is MASSIVE by the standards of other NAS 4-Bays in the market, arriving on a single SODIMM module and is non-ECC (again, price limitation no doubt, but also a CPU limitation too by Intel). Talking of CPU limitations, the N300 CPU is rated at a maximum of 16GB of memory by Intel, yet Terramaster provides 32GB. Terramaster states that as long as you are using their own SODIMM memory modules, you can fully utilize the full 32GB in their TOS software as they have designed it that way, but I was unable to fully test and verify this.

Then there are the 2x NVMe M.2 bays that allow you to install 1-2 Gen 3 SSDs inside to make this technically a 6 Bay NAS (4x SATA and 2x M.2). You can use these M.2 bays for the TOS operating system (so apps, services, and features run with low, low latency), as caching for the main storage, or even as just standalone storage pools for priority storage.

Digging into the hardware architecture, we were able to see that these are PCIe Gen 3×2 architecture, which was to be expected given the 8 (technically 9) lanes of PCIe afforded to the N300 CPU. This means that you will halve the speed of any PCIe Gen 3×4 SSDs that you install in these bays, which is quite common these days nonetheless and is at least x2 speed when many of their competitors would have spread the lanes out more and restricted these slots to x1.

However, we do need to at least highlight that an alternative allocation of these lanes (1 M.2 perhaps or limiting the lanes/speed in other areas) might well have allowed a x2 or x4 PCIe slot or onboard 10GbE to be available. Overall, for the price tag and capabilities at your disposal in the F4-424 Pro, I am really happy with the hardware inside and it definitely puts it ahead of the majority of other 4-bays available in 2024 so far in terms of internal HW.

Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS Review – TOS Software

f you are an existing Terramaster NAS owner, or are someone that has been considering their NAS brand for your private server purchase, then you might have heard that they recently released their latest BIG software update. Upgrading from TOS 4 to TOS 5, this new update brings a huge range of improvements in the GUI, available applications, supported services, security and user controls to their NAS systems.  It is important to note that even though TOS 5 is now fully released and in its non-beater version, some applications are still in beta within this software platform and although I will touch on them throughout this review, I will make a point of highlighting when some applications in full release or are still in Beta. These include Terra Photos, Terrasync tools, Centralized Backup, and elements of Terra Search and Surveillance Manager. Although all of these applications are still available in the app center, the experiences I had with them still demonstrate that they are not in their final form and suffered weak resource sharing with the rest of TOS5. Otherwise, all other elements discussed in this review are in their full-release candidate form. Additionally, at the time of writing, TOS5 is not available for ARM processor NAS devices. I made a MASSIVE review of TOS 5 in it’s own dedicated article below, which I recommend you read if you want to know the FULL scope of what TOS 5 can and cannot do:

Click Below to read the FULL Review of TOS 5 for Terramaster NAS

What I liked in TOS 5

  • The GUI is considerably clearer and much more vibrant.
  • The options and icons in the GUI are much more responsive and clear against other background activities.
  • There are considerably more backup and synchronization tools in TOS5.
  • There are a vastly improved number of storage configurations and services available at your disposal.
  • The mixed drive TRAID Is going to win serious points with ex-synology owners.
  • The system includes direct tech support and remote access terminal for official support and difficulties
  • The network isolation mode in TOS5 is both unique to the brand and particularly helpful.
  • The resource monitor is 10 times better than in previous versions of TOS 5 and genuinely useful.

What I did not like in TOS 5

  • The upgrade path between TOS4 and TOS5 is not as smooth as it should be. And will confuse some and concern others.
  • Multimedia tools are a little lacking and although there is a general DLNA media server application and the photo app in beta, there is no dedicated video or music tool available.
  • The Surveillance tool has kinda gone dark/disappeared!

New Features & Improvements in Existing Services in TOS

In TOS 5, not only have the storage structure and data interaction mode been reconstructed but also, compared with the previous generation, it adds more than 50 features and 600 improvements. The new features meet more business requirements, as well as significantly improve response speed, security, and ease of use.

Browser Access to TOS is Now 3x Times Faster

TOS 5 adopts progressive JavaScript language and a lightweight framework with a faster loading speed. TOS 5 features bidirectional data binding, easier data manipulation, and automatic synchronous response to data changes in the page; UI, data, and structure separation make it easier to change data without the need to modify logic codes. Using progressive JavaScript language, TOS 5 has a more lightweight framework. In addition, through two-way binding of data, the view, data and structure are separated. When the page is operated, it automatically responds to changes in data, which makes the system “lighter” and achieves a faster loading speed.

New caching technology avoids network round trips between the server and the database, bypasses the calculation that occupies resources, saves server resources, and improves response time and waiting time, so TOS 5 has the fastest response time in the current TOS family. Compared with the last generation, the TOS 5 response speed has increased by 300%! Use WASM to optimize the calculation method and execute the back-end complex calculations on the front-end, thereby reducing the calculation pressure on the server. In addition, TOS 5 uses the most popular back-end language at the moment, which can support high concurrent requests. Compared with traditional interpreted languages, the compilation speed is faster.

Improved Resource Monitor in TOS 5

The new iconic resource monitor board allows you to grasp the operating status of your TNAS comprehensively and intuitively in real-time; at-a-glance visibility of system load, CPU and memory usage, network traffic, disk I/O, device temperature, storage, processes, online users, listening ports, and system resource occupancy. Historical records of up to 30 days can be easily traced back.

Full One Button System Isolation Mode Available in TOS 5

TerraMaster’s unique security isolation mode completely isolates your TNAS device from the external network through network isolation, digital signature, and file format restriction, providing a safer operating environment and effective protection against virus and ransomware attacks.

Support of the WORM File System in TOS5

Data can be written at one time within the customized protection period and cannot be deleted or modified. This effectively protects your data from malicious damage, deletion, or tampering and provides data protection for up to 70 years; essential for the financial, judicial, medical, and scientific research sectors, as well as other business users.

Improved Storage, Backup & Sync Features in Terramaster TOS 5

TOS 5 features optimized storage architecture to reduce the system space occupation. The file deduplication system, file system compression, TRAID elastic array, and other functions also save you up to 40% of storage space

Single Portal Folder Level Backup for Home and SMB Users

Reduce complexity and embrace simplicity. All backup needs can be completed through a single portal, providing one-stop backup solutions including Central Backup, TerraSync, Duple Backup, Snapshot, USB Copy, CloudSync, and other comprehensive backup tools. This meets your clients’ disaster recovery and restoration requirements, as well as backup policies and destinations.

Business Focused ProActive Backups for Larger Business

To improve management efficiency, medium and larger-sized businesses need a centralized and active backup solution for multiple users, PCs, and servers. Centralized Backup is a business-oriented backup solution that supports backup and restoration for multiple device types. You can centrally backup data of dozens or even hundreds of PCs, servers, or virtual machines with only one TNAS.

New Flexible RAID Support in TRAID in TOS 5

By optimizing the traditional RAID mode, TerraMaster RAID (TRAID) gives you flexible disk array configuration, flexible online migration, capacity expansion, and redundancy policies. As well as improving disk space utilization, it also provides solutions and security protection for storage space changes caused by new business requirements. Much like Synology Hybrid RAID (SHR) in that you can mix drive capacities for improved storage after the RAID redundancy calculation. I reached out to Terramaster directly on this and they confirm that this function is supported in TOS 5.

Multiple Client Sync with TerraSync in TOS 5

TerraSync, a TerraMaster self-developed synchronization tool, realizes data synchronization between multiple users and multiple devices. It efficiently implements data sharing among branch offices and data synchronization between individuals on multiple devices and platforms, which assists employees in collaborative work and improves work efficiency.

New CloudSync Application for Bare Metal-to-Cloud Live Sync in TOS 5

The new CloudSync app integrates multiple cloud drives and syncs them into one application, including Google Drive, One Drive, Amazon S3, Backblaze, Box, Dropbox, Koofr, OpenDrive, pCloud, Yandex disk, and Aliyun. This allows users to centralize the management of multiple synchronization tasks and add a variety of cloud disk synchronization options including Aliyun and Rackspace. A more flexible, stable, and efficient solution for data synchronization between your TNAS and cloud drives is facilitated by your choice of customized synchronization strategies, such as traffic control, scheduled tasks, and encryption.

CCTV Surveillance in Terramaster TOS 5

TNAS is an ideal video recording storage device. The new Surveillance Manager makes full use of TNAS storage resources to realize camera management, real-time monitoring, video storage, playback, query, event and activity monitoring and recording, providing you with economic and flexible video monitoring management tools to safeguard your personal and property safety.

AI Photo Recognition Now Available in TOS 5 with Terra Photo

Terra Photos is TerraMaster’s brand-new AI photo management application that provides smart solutions for your photo management and sharing; it uses intelligent AI algorithms to identify and classify faces, pets, locations, and other objects in your photos.

Docker Added to Existing Container Tools in TOS 5

Combined with docker-compose and portainer, the new Docker Manager features an optimized operation interface, with multiple new features which provide visual management that meets all your requirements for container customization and flexible configuration.

New Update to Terramaster’s Mobile App, TNAS Mobile 5

To adapt to TOS 5, TNAS mobile has also ushered in a comprehensive update, TNAS mobile 5. Featuring an optimized user interface and interaction, it has also added mobile phone backup, photo management, personal folders, team folders, data safebox, TerraSync, remote administrator, and other functions, which provide more convenience for remote access, mobile office, and remote management of your TNAS. Once again, I need to highlight that the T6-423 NAS needs to be viewed with its price tag always in mind. With software and hardware that is available on other NAS brand devices, it is easy to imagine that this device is a much, more affordable alternative to QNAP or Synology NAS. However, you should always remember that this device is still aimed at those looking for a first dip into NAS and if should be compared with WD NAS and D-Link when making your choice of NAS. it is DEFINITELY better than those and arrives at a better price, but it may still be a year or more before the Terramaster TOS Software platform can compete with DSM and QTS. That said, the Beta is really showing that TOS is going to evolve even further and for more information about the TerraMaster TOS operating System, I recommend visiting my software review here from a couple of years ago.

Key Software and NAS tasks that are supported are:

  • RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, JBOD – as well as TRAID, the Flexible RAID configuration
  • Apple Time Machine Backup
  • Cloud Migration and Synchronization
  • NAS to NAS Rsync Support
  • Plex Media Server
  • Docker
  • Mail Server
  • Web Server
  • DLNA Media Server
  • WordPress Server
  • Download Server
  • Snapshot Support

With a good range of applications to choose from, as well as the support of modern NAS applications in the mix, the TerraMaster T9-450 does give you a good base with which to start your NAS journey, though it may feel a little streamlined for those with greater NAS experience. It is also worth mentioning that TOS 5.1 is currently available in Beta (as of Jan 2023 to now) and includes numerous improvements that include:

1. Upgraded kernel – The TOS 5.1 kernel has been updated from 4.19 to 5.15. Compared to the previous generation kernel, TOS 5.1 Beta optimized EXT4/Btrfs/NTFs file systems and SMB3 file server, used ext4/f2fs/ubifs file system encryption in the encryption API, enabled Apple M1 SoC functionality under Linux and added USB 4 interface support, which greatly improved the performance and security of file system.

2. 4K hardware decoding – The new hardware decoding driver for Intel Jasper Lake GPU is added, which will significantly improve 4K video hardware decoding capability for TerraMaster NAS.

3. Storage pool expansion via USB – By connecting TerraMaster USB disk array, users can easily expand the storage space of the storage pool for TNAS. It supports TRAID/RAID 0/RAID 1/RAID 5/RAID 6 array mode and provide 10Gb storage bandwidth. Compared with eSATA or mini SAS expansion enclosures, TerraMaster USB expansion enclosures are more economical and more convenient.

4. Hyper Cache – TerraMaster Hyper Cache is TerraMaster unique SSD cache acceleration tool. Hyper Cache can provide up to 3 cache modes to choose from to suit different usage needs, and can also create disk arrays for SSDs to increase cache speed and security. Such configuration delivers high-speed storage that’s ideal for video editing.

5. Categorized notifications – TOS 5.1 Beta optimizes system messages and divides message notifications into four levels: information, success, error, and warning. Each level of messages is marked with a more eye-catching symbol of different colors. User can always keep track of any abnormalities in the system and ensure the security of the system and data.

6. USB storage management – TOS 5.1 fully optimizes the mounting of USB partitions. The system will record the path of the last mounted USB partition. When re-mounting next time, the original path will be allocated first to provide more storage space for the use and backup of USB.

7. Optimized Docker Manager – TerraMaster launches updated version of Docker Manager and updates the Docker engine to 20.10.17 version. The optimized interface brings it in line with users’ aesthetics and usage habits. Container deployment is more flexible and TerraMaster NAS utilization is optimized.

8. Better AI computing performance – TOS 5.1 replaced the more powerful Intel OpenVINO AI computing engine, combined with the new Terra Photos application, the intelligent photo recognition efficiency increased by 30%. Terra Photo is designed for home users and photography enthusiasts to manage photo storage, share and access photos from anywhere.

Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS Review – Conclusion and Verdict

The TerraMaster F4-424 Pro NAS is a powerful 4-bay turnkey NAS system that offers competitive pricing and robust hardware. With its Intel i3 N300 CPU, 32GB DDR5 memory, and 2x M.2 NVMe SSD bays, it provides excellent performance for various tasks, including Plex media streaming and hardware transcoding. In terms of design, the F4-424 Pro features a sleek and modern chassis with improved cooling and hot-swapping capabilities. It represents a significant step forward in design compared to TerraMaster’s older 4-bay models, aligning more closely with industry leaders like Synology and QNAP. The addition of TOS 5 software brings significant improvements in GUI clarity, backup tools, storage configurations, and security features. However, the absence of 10GbE support and limited scalability in this regard might disappoint advanced users. Additionally, while the hardware exceeds Intel’s memory limitations, full utilization of the 32GB DDR5 memory is reliant on Terramaster’s own SODIMM modules, and this could be a limitation for some users. Overall, the TerraMaster F4-424 Pro NAS offers excellent value for its price, with competitive hardware and software features. It positions itself as a strong contender in the 4-bay NAS market, particularly for those looking for an affordable yet capable private server solution.

  • Powerful Hardware:** Equipped with an Intel i3 N300 CPU and 32GB DDR5 memory, delivering robust performance.
  • Redesigned Chassis:** Improved design for better cooling, hot-swapping, and internal accessibility.
  • TOS 5 Software:** TerraMaster’s TOS 5 software offers a clear GUI, enhanced backup tools, expanded storage options, and improved security features.
  • Affordable Price:** Competitive pricing under $699 makes it an attractive option for its hardware and software capabilities.
  • Flexible RAID Support:** Supports various RAID configurations, including TRAID for flexible disk array setup.
  • Multiple Client Sync:** TerraSync tool efficiently synchronizes data across multiple users and devices.
  • CCTV Surveillance:** Surveillance Manager offers video recording and monitoring features for added security.
  • AI Photo Recognition:** Terra Photos uses AI algorithms to classify and manage photos effectively.
  • No 10GbE Support:** Lacks 10GbE support, potentially limiting network speed for some users.
  • Memory Over-specification:** The inclusion of 32GB memory may raise concerns, given the CPU’s maximum support of 16GB.
  • Limited Packaging Quality:** Packaging and presentation are basic and may not match the standards of competitors.

Click the link below to take you to your local Amazon store and where to buy the terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS.

 

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Kylian Mbappé qui fait la promo d’un jeu de casino en ligne ? C’est une arnaque en deepfake

2 février 2024 à 15:02

Des publicités sur Facebook détournent la voix de Kylian Mbappé ainsi que des présentateurs de journaux télévisés. Le but ? Faire la promotion d'application de jeux en ligne. Les escrocs utilisent des outils de clonage de voix par intelligence artificielle.

Synology BeeStation – Should You Buy? (Short Review)

Par : Rob Andrews
2 février 2024 à 15:00

Synology BeeStation – Should You Buy? (Short Review)

Of all the products I’ve spoken about from Synology in nearly 25 years of solutions, the new BeeStation is possibly one of the most conventional yet surprising they have ever released. We first spoke about the BeeStation, otherwise known as the BST150-4T, halfway through 2023, when we started hearing rumors about Synology’s new entry-level solution that was shaping up to challenge the likes of WD My Cloud and My Book solutions. Synology has been providing impressively capable personal cloud solutions for a considerably long time, but it would be fair to say that for the majority of users who just want a simple cloud solution that is easy even for a child to set up, DSM isn’t quite as straightforward as they would like. The BeeStation and BSM hope to remedy this with Synology providing what is potentially the most user-friendly and easy-to-use personal cloud solution they have ever provided, as well as inviting positive comparisons against the likes of Google Drive and iCloud in terms of price. Roll in the fact that the system already arrives pre-populated with four terabytes of storage and is priced at just $199, and what you find here is one of the biggest brands in the world in network attached storage trying to reinvent the wheel that they themselves had a big part in designing! If you are reading this, it is because you are wondering whether the Synology BeeStation is the perfect fit for your simple, low-scale, and low-cost private cloud. So today, I want to tell you the five reasons why I can highly recommend the Synology BeeStation, as well as providing five reasons why you might want to give it a miss.

UPDATE – You can watch the FULL YouTube Review of the Synology BeeStation HERE

Or Read the FULL Massive Beestation Review HERE

Please note – This review is being conducted on a BeeStation 4TB NAS system with pre-launch software, so there is every opportunity that a number of the criticisms below may be addressed at launch on March 6th 2024. It is recommended that you read our full and extensive deep-dive review on the Beestation when it is live.

Synology BeeStation Personal Cloud Review – Quick Conclusion

Synology has clearly done their homework on the development and presentation of the BeeStation private cloud. They are targeting a whole new audience with this system, and therefore, criticisms based on experiences with their other hardware are likely to fall on deaf ears. The BeeStation is probably one of the best middle grounds I have ever seen between an easy-to-use and exceptionally easy-to-set-up private cloud system, while still managing to provide smooth and seamless features for accessing and sharing your private cloud’s storage securely. Looking at this system with a more network-savvy microscope kind of defeats the point, and I’ve tried to be fair in my assessment. The lack of LAN access by default seems a little odd, and launching the BeeStation series in this single-bay, 4TB-only fashion may be a bit of a marketing misstep, but overall, what you’re seeing here is an effectively priced and scaled private cloud system. It’s a fantastic alternative to third-party clouds and existing simplified NAS systems. With many users keeping an eye on their budgets and tightening costs, Synology, known for its premium position in the market, had a challenge scaling down to this kind of user. However, I have to applaud Synology’s R&D for creating a simple and easy-to-use personal cloud solution that still carries a lot of their charm and great software reputation. It may not be as feature-rich as DSM, but BSM does exactly what it says it will do, and I think the target audience it’s designed for will enjoy the BeeStation a great deal!

SOFTWARE - 7/10
HARDWARE - 8/10
PERFORMANCE - 7/10
PRICE - 10/10
VALUE - 10/10


8.4
PROS
👍🏻User-friendly setup, ideal for beginners or those seeking a simple cloud solution.
👍🏻Secure data handling with encrypted data transmission.
👍🏻Comes with 4TB of storage included, offering good value.
👍🏻Compact and lightweight design, enhancing portability.
👍🏻Quiet operation, suitable for home or office environments.
👍🏻Integrates seamlessly with popular cloud services like Google Drive and OneDrive.
👍🏻Affordable pricing at $199, a cost-effective alternative to third-party cloud services.
👍🏻Supports remote access, allowing data management from anywhere and across client devices/OS
👍🏻Synologys reputation for quality and reliability is still clear on this smaller scale.
👍🏻Several client tools (BeeFiles, BeePhotos and Desktop sync tool) for Windows, Mac, iOS and Android available for tailored access
👍🏻System configuration backup option to USB/C2 (Often absent in budget cloud solutions)
👍🏻AI Photo Recognition in BeePhotos for faces, Objects and geo data scraping + Advanced filter/search
CONS
👎🏻Lacks the extensive app support and customization found in Synology\'s DSM platform.
👎🏻Only available in a single-bay, 4TB configuration at launch, limiting expandability.
👎🏻Single 5400RPM HDD running everything leads to slowdown more than you think!
👎🏻LAN access is disabled by default, which may not suit all users.
👎🏻Designed for a specific user base, may not meet the needs of more advanced users.

Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?


These Offers are Checked Daily

Reasons You Should Buy the Synology BeeStation

Synology has done an incredible job here of changing a number of core tenets about their existing large NAS series to produce the far more streamlined BeeStation system. Here are five reasons why it certainly gets my recommendation. Before we go further though, what about those hardware specifications? What keeps this system going?

Specification Details
CPU Realtek RTD1619B
RAM 1GB DDR4
Storage Capacity 4TB built-in HDD
Networking Gigabit Ethernet; No Wi-Fi capability
Ports 1 x USB-A 3.2 Gen 1, 1 x USB-C 3.2 Gen 1
Operating System BeeStation Manager (BSM)
Cloud Integration Supports Google Drive, OneDrive
Remote Access Via mobile apps and web interface
Number of Simultaneous Users Up to 8 people
Supported Operating Systems Windows, macOS, iOS, Android
Apps and Tools BeePhotos for mobile, other integrated tools for photo and file management
Physical Dimensions 148 x 63 x 196mm; Weight: 820g
Security Features Encrypted data transmission; SSH not enabled by default
Local Access Available post initial setup
Additional Features Built-in AI for photo recognition, Facial and Object recognition speed boosts

So, with that out the way, why should you consider the Beestation as your ideal private cloud solution?

The EASIEST Synology NAS You Will Ever Own

I really cannot stress enough how straightforward and easy it was to set up the Synology BeeStation, especially when compared to any other Synology NAS that I’ve utilized here on the channel or on the blog. Just to put it into perspective, here’s how setting up a normal Synology DiskStation NAS and setting up the Synology BeeStation compare. Setting up an ordinary Synology NAS takes around 15 to 20 minutes minimum, if you know what you are doing. You need to first install the appropriate storage media of hard drives and/or SSDs into the individual slots. Then, connect the device to your local area network and the power supply and boot up. You need to wait 2 minutes for the system to fully initialize, whereupon you begin the initialization process and download the latest operating system manually via the on-screen prompts in your web browser on a device connected to the local area network. Then, provide your login credentials and go into the storage manager to begin setting up your storage area, including your storage pools, volumes, and shared folders to distribute your data effectively. If you want to take advantage of services such as cloud synchronization, manage your backups, and create an online access account with Synology services, these will add something like 20 to 30 minutes to setup (even longer if you are factoring in more complicated RAID pools such as RAID 5 or 6).

Here is a 40+ minute video showing how to Setup a Synology DSM NAS (so NOT the BeeStation), to give you some idea of how long it takes Synology Diskstation systems:

Now, what about setting up the BeeStation? Well, you take the device out of its box, plug it into the internet, use absolutely any device, mobile or desktop, with an internet connection, and visit the Synology online portal. Then, enter the system serial number for the assistant to be found remotely to set up an account, and the device is genuinely ready to go in around 90 seconds.

Here is a 1-minute gif showing the Beestation setup in Realtime:

The system storage, sync, and backup applications, and creating the Synology account needed for remote access to the system are either all included in that first initialization or will add upwards of 30 more seconds to the installation. We are talking about one of the most foolproof cloud systems I have ever seen, with the added benefit that you can set the device up from cold boot in anything from 2 to 3 minutes. The logic for this extends to the general use of the system, with the BeeStation Manager software being extraordinarily straightforward and easy to use. We will get on to later the extent to which this software can be utilized, but if what you are looking for is easy-to-use, straightforward, and uncomplicated cloud management, the BeeStation definitely has your back!

Surprisingly Reasonable Pricing…Especially for the Included 4TB Storage

The $199 price point that the BeeStation arrives at, especially once you factor in exactly what you are getting for your money long-term, is extraordinarily impressive. Keep in mind, you’re not just getting the system on its own, but a ready-to-go remote access NAS cloud that also arrives with four terabytes of internal storage right out of the gate. To put this into perspective, if you were to utilize popular cloud services such as Google Drive, Dropbox, iCloud, and OneDrive, you would pay around $80 to $100 a year for two terabytes of storage on average. So, if you double this to cover the same 4TB of storage included with the Synology BeeStation, you find that the BeeStation costs within one year exactly as much as popular cloud storage providers, and, in the case of iCloud, actually costs less than the Apple cloud alternative in just one year.

Note – Prices for the 3rd party cloud services below may include other cloud services, but are also often limited to cost-per-user

But it does not stop there. Remember, with those cloud services, after one year, if you do not keep paying, you lose that storage area and will either have to accept its inevitable deletion or spend money on a storage device to pull that data off the cloud. The BeeStation, on the other hand, for that $199 is yours to keep long-term and, alongside arriving with 3 years of manufacturer’s hardware warranty, also comes with an effective lifetime support warranty covering updates, security, and feature improvements. Add to that the myriad of client applications and potential synchronization with larger Synology DiskStation devices down the line, and what you have here is extraordinary value for money when compared with third-party cloud alternatives, but also generally for the cost of a 4TB NAS device in general.

Sync with 3rd Party Cloud, NOT Just Synology C2

This is a very minor point for those out of the loop, but if you have been following Synology in recent years and the development of their NAS solution platform, you’ll know that they’ve been shifting focus towards first-party services and tools across their hardware lineup. You can understand the logic in them prioritizing their own hardware upgrades, storage, media, and even their own Synology software services when developing their own NAS hardware. While Synology’s platform does support a number of third-party hardware and software providers, it’s fair to say that in recent years they have definitely shifted focus towards prioritizing their own options first (for reasons of compatibility, synergy, and profitability almost certainly).

However, huge credit to them for how they have handled cloud synchronization on the BeeStation. For those unaware, cloud synchronization is when your physical NAS solution (commonly referred to as your bare metal) is synchronized with an internet-accessible cloud platform, either for use as a secondary access point for lower priority users or as a secondary backup location between your physical bare metal NAS and an off-site location. Synology has had their own cloud platform, Synology C2, for a number of years now, and it’s been growing in popularity and scale year on year. It would have been easy to limit cloud synchronization on the BeeStation to only their cloud platform, and given the price and target audience, many would not have been surprised. HOWEVER, the Synology BeeStation supports a number of third-party cloud platforms such as Google and OneDrive for cloud synchronization natively, without requiring any additional app or add-on. Full credit to Synology for still supporting synchronization with other cloud platforms when they already have their own in play. Of course, you can use Synology C2 if you wish, and there’s also an argument that Synology provided this to make it easier for users to migrate from those third-party cloud platforms to their own. Nevertheless, I really do have to give them credit for maintaining third-party cloud sync on this device.

REALLY Quiet Operation and Small Impact

Another thing that is going to be music to the ears of people who are simply looking for an alternative to third-party cloud providers in the form of a physical solution in their office or home with remote access, is that the BeeStation is phenomenally low impact in practically every way. The internal hardware configuration of the Realtek RTD1619B and 1GB DDR4 memory is a great middle ground between efficiency and system capability. Synology has been experimenting with this configuration of a 64-bit ARM processor and gigabyte memory for a number of years, with other solutions already arriving for more than a year with this hardware configuration.

This ensures that they’ve had ample time to make the most of what this config can do. Add to that, this system is tremendously small, small enough to fit in a big coat pocket or a laptop bag while barely being noticed, and well under a kilo in weight, making it surprisingly portable if need be. Finally, the system is almost completely noiseless and, thanks to the more modest 4TB hard drive inside (a Synology branded Plus Series value drive), the system is incredibly low noise when in operation. The casing that the BeeStation arrives with is a completely unique design compared to the rest of their hardware solutions and is easily one of the smallest they have ever produced. Ultimately, the point I’m making is that the BeeStation is going to be almost unnoticeable when deployed, even at close proximity.

The BeeStation Fills the Gap Left by WD and Seagate in ‘Easy NAS’ Systems

Let’s be honest, although Synology has certainly retooled their existing NAS solutions to provide a far more streamlined private cloud solution here, they were not the first to design a product like this. When Synology first made it big all those years ago, they didn’t do it because they were the first in the market to provide this kind of solution; they became popular because, unlike alternatives from the likes of Seagate and WD at the time, Synology was providing a personal cloud solution that was also exceptionally capable and feature-rich compared to the more rudimentary options in the market that were effectively hard drives connected to the internet. Fast forward to now, and although Synology has continued to innovate, improve, and expand upon what is included in Synology DSM and their other bigger NAS systems, there are quite a lot of users who desire a more simplified private cloud solution as they don’t want to waste time or energy learning how to utilize their equipment – they just want it to do what it says it will do, and do it well! Over the years, brands like WD with their My Cloud and My Book systems have persisted. However, the personal cloud and small scale simplified NAS market has changed rapidly in recent years, and Western Digital has lost a lot of its market share for numerous reasons. The simpler-to-use WDOS that their My Cloud systems arrive with has struggled to find a balance between simplicity and rich features, leading to inconsistencies that have either annoyed the more technically aware or befuddled the more amateur. This on its own would probably not be so bad, but things got really bad for Western Digital.

Over the course of the last 4 to 5 years, WD has been beset by numerous failings across the different NAS solutions they have provided. One of the earliest and loudest was their use of SMR drives in their WD Red series, which led many to question whether WD had the right idea about what a NAS solution was supposed to do and offer. Then, a couple of years later, WD NAS solutions were hit by a remote hack targeted at deleting users’ data, caused by infrequent firmware updates that users were not actioning, and also because WD was not adequately updating users. However, the worst example was when WD in 2023 was hit by an enormous cybersecurity incident which led to WD My Cloud systems being completely taken offline with remote access inaccessible. Because of the rudimentary design of these systems, users were ill-equipped and poorly informed about what was going on, and this hurt the reputation of the WD My Cloud and My Book systems extensively. The point I am making here is that there has been a gap in the market for a while that needs to be filled for those looking for simple yet reliable private cloud solutions, and Synology already has a big reputation in the world of premium NAS. So, this is a perfect time for them to produce a streamlined alternative to their own solution portfolio that fills the void left by the likes of WD in recent years, and the BeeStation is ideally suited in terms of price, hardware, and software to do this.

However, nothing is perfect and if you think the BeeStation is the same as any other Synology NAS solution, you may be in for disappointment. Let’s go through all the reasons why you might want to give the Synology BeeStation a miss.

Reasons You Should NOT Buy the Synology BeeStation

The majority of reasons why the Synology BeeStation may not suit your needs largely fall under the umbrella of ‘simplicity’. Synology has clearly targeted a very new and more entry-level audience with this product. So, if you are an existing owner of a Synology DSM NAS system or someone who is a bit more tech-savvy, these reasons why you might not want to buy the BeeStation will resonate with you.

It’s very, VERY Basic Compared with Other Synology NAS with DSM

Huge credit to Synology for retooling and reinventing the presentation of their existing NAS platform to create the more streamlined BeeStation system, but we have to acknowledge that the BeeStation and BSM are incredibly basic compared to DiskStation Manager. Earlier, I touched on how simple it is to set up the first time, and while that is true, the more simplified user experience also means that options for configuration, customization, and general upgradability are significantly limited. The BSM user interface consists of only around five different windows, each dedicated to the more rudimentary features of this system. If what you care about is general storage, there is a lot to enjoy here, and the baseline applications from Synology DSM for file management, backup management, and folder management are all present.

However, the BeeStation and BSM platform are more storage-only systems that provide a small toolkit for maximizing that storage for backups and general access. Additionally, likely in order not to confuse or overwhelm the user with configuration, the actual options for sharing this system are also more limited than a normal DSM NAS. The number of maximum supported users is much lower, features such as read/write permissions are absent, sophisticated native storage file system choices such as iSCSI are absent, and even the options for connecting this to another NAS system at launch are quite limited. Again, if you are just looking for your own private cloud with no bells and whistles and easy day-to-day use, this device is perfect. But it is not an alternative to Synology DSM in terms of overall scope.

Not Available Unpopulated or in Other Capacities (at Launch)

One can appreciate that Synology almost certainly has a larger launch campaign for the Synology BeeStation up its sleeve, but it was perhaps a little short-sighted to only launch a single device in a single capacity. In its 25 years of business, Synology has produced numerous scales of systems in terms of system power and storage capacity, so it is a little unfair to criticize them for not going at it with the same level of thrust when launching a whole new arm of their business. However, there is valid criticism to highlight that the system is only available in a four-terabyte capacity (likely with larger capacities to be fair), but also that there is no 0TB/Empty option. Synology solutions have always arrived unpopulated, allowing flexibility in choosing storage. No doubt, in the interest of simplicity, Synology has rolled this solution out with their own branded drives as compulsory. If you dig into the Synology download area for manual system updates, you also find that the firmware updates for the BeeStation are much larger than those found in traditional DSM despite those systems not having storage media by default. This is because BSM arrives with applications for backup and storage management pre-installed and pre-allocated to the 4TB Synology hard drive configuration, meaning the firmware is locked to the 4TB model, and more specifically, to a Synology hard drive. So, long-time Synology veterans might not be huge fans of the fact that this system is only available in a 4TB capacity and that there is no means to install alternative hard drives or get the system without one. However, realistically, they are not the target audience for this product.

Additionally, there is no avoiding that the system OS and a single 5400RPM HDD (if it is the HAT3300 inside) definitely adds up to system slowdown during even vaguely busy periods of use. Numerous times during the testing of the device, during backups, indexing or client synchronization the poor multi-tasking of a single HDD resulted in slower responses. Synology are clearly aware of this too, as on numerous occasions the BeeStation GUI would warn me to expect responsiveness to decrease during these periods. I appreciated that the system was warning me, but nonetheless this does not excuse the overall slow response that is clearly the result of the hardware on offer here.

The Beestation is Only Available as a 1-Bay – No RAID (at Launch)

Going further on the subject of the 4TB storage, it’s also surprising to see Synology roll out this system in a single-bay configuration. If you had told me that Synology was rolling out a new low-powered alternative to the likes of the WD My Cloud, I would have bet that the first solution would be a 2-Bay/RAID 1 ready solution. However, the BeeStation only features a single 4TB hard drive, meaning the redundancy/failover/safety net of RAID is not available here. The system does feature two USB ports, allowing you to connect USB storage and set up an automated backup to those external drives, and with its gigabit network connectivity, you can backup off-site or to another system in your local area network, which are all great backup options. But the fact that the system’s core storage does not have any kind of failover in this launch product is quite disappointing for a brand that takes storage seriously, and I would much rather have seen at least a two-bay version of this product at launch. It kind of has an all-eggs-in-one-basket feel about it that, if you do not have up-to-the-second synchronized backups off-site, could lead to hot data being lost very easily.

No App Centre = No Popular 1st/3rd Party Apps

Once again, this is a criticism that stems from more experienced Synology DSM NAS users, and arguably one that won’t arise from Synology’s new target audience for this product, but the lack of any kind of app center for tailored add-ons on BSM and the BeeStation is really disappointing. Synology has a phenomenal catalog of applications and services in its app center that allow users to curate, categorize, and access files in very tailored ways. You’re missing out on a video application for streaming your media with scraped metadata and transcoding, an audio application to share your albums and curate your playlists, and support for third-party multimedia tools for seamless access to third-party clients – these are just the multimedia options you’re missing out on in the BeeStation due to its lack of an app center or any kind of app store, as you would find in DSM.

Digging a little deeper, you suddenly realize the full range of applications and services Synology has offered for years that are just not available here to be downloaded conveniently at your whim from an app center. There is no denying that Synology is going to improve BSM over time and likely roll a number of these key first-party applications into the base BSM package. But if you are someone used to a Synology NAS and one of the reasons you chose it was because of the more application-rich experience compared to WD NAS OS, QNAP’s QTS, or even the Seagate NAS OS (which might well be EOL now), the Synology BeeStation is not going to be for you.

Requires a Synology Account to Set Up, and LAN is OFF by Default

This is a relatively minor point, but in some circumstances, it’s incredibly crucial for some. When setting up the Synology BeeStation for the first time, it’s important to note that you are not setting it up over the local area network in the majority of cases. Setting up the BeeStation requires the system to be plugged into an internet-accessible network, and then setup is conducted via an online portal using your serial number. A Synology account needs to be created during its setup, and by default, the system is accessible via the internet, through Synology’s servers. To Synology’s credit, it still manages to be one of the most secure NAS platforms out there, with data transmission encrypted by default via the remote access service, and features such as SSH are not enabled by default. But there are users who prefer using their NAS system exclusively offline, limiting access to only the local area network, and manually injecting updates from their client system. I was surprised during my first experimentation with the device to find that local area network (LAN) access is disabled by default.

Again, I understand that Synology wants to remove any tricky customization or configuration choices for users who might want a simplified and streamlined cloud experience. However, local area network access I would consider to be a base-level requirement. In the event that you lose access to the system via the internet, or if you lose access to the system despite being in the same room as it, the fact that LAN access is disabled by default may prove extraordinarily tricky. A great example would be the WD security incident I mentioned earlier. One reason users were particularly impacted by WD turning off the My Cloud servers was that WD My Cloud NAS devices have LAN disabled by default. This meant those users could not access the system during that internet outage unless they used a complicated client tool method to enable it. Although this method seemed relatively straightforward to the more tech-savvy, it proved overwhelming and complicated to the less storage and network-savvy audience these products are targeted towards. You are likely able to use Synology Assistant to log into the system via local area network access and reconfigure this option via a client application, but even then, it’s by no means a streamlined process. Nevertheless, I do think disabling LAN access on the system by default is perhaps a little shortsighted and overzealous.

Synology BeeStation Personal Cloud – The Final Verdict

The Synology BeeStation marks a significant shift in Synology’s product line, targeting a new segment of users with its simplified yet functional design. This device stands out as an excellent middle ground between ease of use and a comprehensive private cloud system, providing secure and seamless access to stored data. While it is incredibly user-friendly and easy to set up, the lack of LAN access by default and its single-bay, 4TB-only configuration at launch might limit its appeal to more tech-savvy users or those seeking greater flexibility and expandability. The BeeStation’s unique selling point is its simplicity, making it a compelling choice for those new to NAS systems or for users who prioritize ease of use over extensive customization options. However, its simplicity also means that it lacks the extensive app support found in Synology’s DSM platform, potentially disappointing users accustomed to the richer application ecosystem offered by Synology’s more advanced models.

For users concerned about security, the BeeStation still upholds Synology’s reputation for secure data handling, with encrypted data transmission as a standard feature. However, experienced users who prefer a more hands-on approach to their NAS setup might find the BeeStation’s lack of advanced configuration options and its reliance on internet access for setup somewhat restrictive. In terms of market positioning, the BeeStation fills a gap left by other brands like WD and Seagate in offering ‘Easy NAS’ systems. Its competitive pricing, particularly considering the included 4TB of storage, makes it an attractive option for users seeking a private cloud solution without the recurring costs associated with third-party cloud services. Despite these potential drawbacks, the BeeStation is a solid entry-level NAS solution, especially for those seeking a personal cloud with minimal setup and maintenance. It may not be as feature-rich as Synology’s DSM-based NAS devices, but for its intended audience, the BeeStation provides a well-balanced combination of functionality, ease of use, and affordability. Synology’s move to cater to a broader, less technically inclined audience with the BeeStation demonstrates their understanding of market trends and user needs, offering a solution that balances simplicity with the reliability and quality Synology is known for.

In the end, the Synology BeeStation is an ideal choice for users seeking a straightforward, reliable, and cost-effective personal cloud solution. It represents Synology’s commitment to diversifying their product range, catering to the evolving needs of different user segments. While it may not suit everyone, especially those looking for advanced features and customization, it excels in its role as a user-friendly, secure, and affordable entry-level NAS device.

 

Synology Beestation 4TB PROS Synology Beestation 4TB CONS
User-friendly setup, ideal for beginners or those seeking a simple cloud solution.

Secure data handling with encrypted data transmission.

Comes with 4TB of storage included, offering good value.

Compact and lightweight design, enhancing portability.

Quiet operation, suitable for home or office environments.

Integrates seamlessly with popular cloud services like Google Drive and OneDrive.

Affordable pricing at $199, a cost-effective alternative to third-party cloud services.

Supports remote access, allowing data management from anywhere and across client devices/OS’.

Synology’s reputation for quality and reliability is still clear on this smaller scale.

Lacks the extensive app support and customization found in Synology’s DSM platform.

Only available in a single-bay, 4TB configuration at launch, limiting expandability.

LAN access is disabled by default, which may not suit all users.

Designed for a specific user base, may not meet the needs of more advanced users.

If you are thinking of buying a Synology NAS, please use the links below as it results in us at NASCompares receiving an affiliate fee from Amazon:

Need More Help Choosing the right NAS?

Choosing the right data storage solution for your needs can be very intimidating and it’s never too late to ask for help. With options ranging from NAS to DAS, Thunderbolt to SAS and connecting everything up so you can access all your lovely data at the touch of a button can be a lot simpler than you think. If you want some tips, guidance or help with everything from compatibility to suitability of a solution for you, why not drop me a message below and I will get back to you as soon as possible with what you should go for, its suitability and the best place to get it. This service is designed without profit in mind and in order to help you with your data storage needs, so I will try to answer your questions as soon as possible.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

The Synology RS1224+ Rackstation – WHERE IS IT???

Par : Rob Andrews
7 février 2024 à 17:24

Where is the Synology RS1224+ Rackstation?

Synology is arguably one of the most popular brands in the entire private server market, and once you then factor in the large number of small and medium-sized businesses migrating away from cloud services and onto their own private NAS, who have been flocking in their droves towards Synology, you can understand why they are something of a big deal. Almost 25 years, the brand has been producing numerous desktop and rackmount NAS solutions (alongside a bunch of other side hustles like routers, storage media, business surveillance tools, and more), but in particular, their growth in the rackmount market in the last 5 to 7 years has been genuinely impressive. Which brings us to the subject of today’s article, where the hell is the Synology RS1224+ RackStation NAS? There has been an undeniable shift in the home lab and small business community away from desktop NAS devices and towards small-scale rackmount solutions, and Synology’s recent releases have certainly capitalized on this, thanks to improved smaller-scale four and eight-bay rackmount servers appearing in their product portfolio.

This combined with changes in the baseline hardware of several of their more recent releases have led to many users looking for a very specific kind of Synology rackmount! It has to be compact, it has to be powerful, it has to be scalable, and it has to be reasonably priced – currently, Synology only provides one solution that fits the bill in every regard, the 2020/2021 released RS1221+, which, despite its merits, is still a system that is almost 3 years old, leading many to question the benefits of investing in a system that is perhaps not as cutting edge as the rest of Synology’s portfolio currently stands. The answer, of course? A refresh (something Synology tends to do with their portfolio every two to three years), which would be the Synology RS1224+. Today we want to discuss everything we know, confirm this unit is coming, the expectations we have, and whether it’s worth waiting for it.

Is the Synology RS1224+ Rackstation NAS ACTUALLY Coming? YES

Is the Synology RS1224+ NAS coming? Well, yes! As early as autumn 2023, we saw numerous references to the RS1224+ model ID floating around in the backend of firmware updates and accidentally left in product compatibility pages on official Synology sites. Equally, there was even a Synology RS1223+ model ID appearing in summer 2023, perhaps indicating that this system was designed to arrive earlier than it has. In more recent weeks, users have taken to digging into the latest Synology DSM firmware updates and finding further references towards the existence of a Synology RS1221 (along with a couple of powerhouse expandable rack mounts, and a series of expansion boxes).

Source: https://www.reddit.com/r/synology/comments/17nj00y/new_synology_nas_and_expansion_units/

None of this is unusual, and for those willing to put in the extra time, you can often find model IDs of upcoming devices if you know where to look. The crucial detail is that clearly a half-depth eight-bay rack mount is indeed on the way from Synology and given its formative mentions in summer 2023, and continued references in 2024, it would indicate that this is a system that Synology has already well featured on their roadmap and factored into their product portfolio.

If you want to play devil’s advocate, one might argue that this product is only a placeholder, a spreadsheet template item, or a hypothetical product that Synology just wants to enter in order to maintain its position in their database. Although that’s not impossible, realistically, there are simply too many references available at this point to deny that Synology is clearly rolling out a product of this hardware and model configuration. Equally, off-the-record discussions with Synology representatives further bolster this point. Ultimately, I think it’s undeniable that Synology is going to continue this product series, but that leads us to the next question: why are users so enamored with the release of the RS1224+?

Why Are Users Waiting for the Synology RS1224+ Rackmount NAS?

As I mentioned earlier, there has been a trend shift away from desktop devices for certain kinds of users. Home enthusiasts often find it considerably more convenient to purchase a small or even medium-sized rack cabinet to be kept somewhere on their property, which can be considerably more efficient for applying numerous rackmount servers than the alternative of utilizing desktop space filled with tower chassis devices. Equally, most businesses do not want to run their main backup or operation server in the same offices they work in and either wish to utilize a separate storage area on the premises or even a small area of physical storage off-site for network and remote personal cloud storage. Much like home lab users who do this for fun, business users can often see tremendous benefits in more modular and compact multi-rackmount devices compared with that of desktop.

However, this reasoning was also largely born out of the fact that right now devices and their physical scale have changed dramatically over the last few years. If you go back even as little as a decade ago, a rackmount device was considerably bigger in depth, much less power-efficient, considerably noisier, and was just generally a much more enterprise and industrial proposition. Thanks to growing efficiencies in server components, smaller but effective cooling systems being developed, and larger storage media allowing systems to occupy fewer storage bays for higher capacity, rackmount devices no longer need to be the big hulking metal monsters they once were, and these days you can pick up four and eight-bay rackmount servers quite easily and affordably. All of this has added up to why users would not only be positively in favor of the release of a new compact, but powerful rackmount NAS system, and why a system like the RS1224+ would be equally popular.

Synology has released several half-depth 30 cm rackmounts (and 40 cm dual power supply rackmounts) in the last few years, a great example being the Synology RS422+, a small, affordable rackmount that provides a decent base level of hardware but does lack the expandability of other devices in their portfolio. Equally, at the start of 2023, Synology rolled out several new medium and large business rackmount devices that provided tremendous power and scalability – but these systems were considerably larger, much more power-hungry, and several times more expensive than the older RS1221+. The perfect middle ground here is the Synology RS1224+, hence why users are sitting quite comfortably on the fence about every other device until they know whether this system is truly arriving and, when it does, what exactly its hardware caliber will be. Let’s discuss what we predict and what we comfortably know about the Synology RS1224+ hardware.

What Are the Estimated Hardware Specifications of the Synology RS1224+ NAS?

As I mentioned earlier, the Synology RS1224+ would not be a completely new and unique product series by the brand but would be a refresh of the existing compact eight-drive rackmount series that the brand has been working on now for more than 5 years. Alongside maintaining a clearly defined portfolio across the whole range of desktop and rackmount devices that they provide, Synology also takes special care to make sure there is not too much overlap when it comes to all of their solutions. Typically when you look at the Synology portfolio, you find that solutions tend to be between $50 and $100 difference in price, and each solution takes that extra bit of investment and puts it into internal performance, total storage, or network connectivity. That also means that products in the Synology portfolio have a tendency to use a small group of CPU and memory combinations and then spread them across a variety of different storage scale devices. This all adds up to us being fairly confident in predicting the internal hardware that the RS1224+ arrives with.

The previous generation arrived with an AMD V1500B quad-core x86 CPU, but Synology has slowly started refreshing all devices with this CPU from the 2019 and 2020 generation towards the new AMD embedded Ryzen V1780B processor. Alongside a higher base clock speed, this is also a more capable CPU, though it does still arrive in the same V1000 product family from AMD. The Synology RS1224+ will definitely arrive with this CPU, as the company has already started rolling it out in their Plus series rackmount, as well as the system definitely arriving with ECC memory. ECC memory has been provided with every single Plus series rackmount that Synology has rolled out in the last 5 years and the RS1224+ will be no exception to this. However, it is still yet to be seen whether the system will arrive with 2GB, 4GB, or 8GB, as Synology has been scaling up the base level of default memory on their systems in the most recent generation refreshes. The rest of the system architecture is fairly easy to predict, with the exception of the network connectivity (more on that in a moment), but below is the expected specifications of the Synology RS1224+ RackStation:

Specification Detail
Model Synology RS1224+ NAS
Price $(TBC)*
Form Factor Half-depth / 2U RackStation
CPU AMD Ryzen Embedded V1780B*
CPU Details 4-Core/8-Thread, 3.35GHz
Memory 8-32GB DDR4 UDIMM ECC
Storage Bays 8x SATA 3.5″/2.5″ (Add 4x More drives with the RX Expansion)
Networking 1x 10GbE Copper (10GBASE-T)*
Expansion Slots 1x PCIe Gen 3×8
LAN Ports 2x / 4x RJ45 1GbE LAN*
Expansion Port 1x eSATA
USB Ports 2x USB 3.2 GEN 1 (5Gb/s)
Dimensions 88 mm x 482 mm x 306.6 mm
Dimensions (RP Version) 88 mm x 482 mm x 407.5 mm
Warranty 3-Year Warranty (5yr Opt)
Additional Notes *massively TBC!!!

There is, however, one area of ambiguity that is still present in the specifications of the Synology RS1224+, the default network connectivity! The system will definitely arrive with at least a couple of 1GbE network ports and will definitely provide a PCIe 3 x8 slot in order to upgrade network connectivity and add combo cards later in the system’s life if needed.

However, what about 10GbE? At the tail end of 2023, Synology saw the release of the Synology RS2423+, a similarly hardware-designed Plus series RackStation solution, that was fully expected to arrive with gigabit networking only. However, when it arrived, Synology provided a 10GBase-T networking port by default (not via a PCIe upgrade, but as standard). Now, this is a 12x HDD system, so there is more than enough media to fully saturate a 10GbE network connection. However, this did not stop Synology in the previous four generations of that RackStation product series from only providing 1GbE by default, so why the change now?

Synology has faced growing criticism from prosumers and small business users for their rather restricted default network connections, limiting the majority of solutions to either 1GbE in their standard class and 10GbE in the power user and enterprise models. Many users have raised questions about Synology perhaps utilizing 2.5 gigabit Ethernet network connections, as used by a majority of their competitors. Others would state that 2.5GbE is something of a technological fad, and 10GbE is the only natural path to go down, so that does bring into question allocating lanes internally to this network bandwidth. The reason I bring the whole thing up is simply that if Synology changed its position on 10GbE on the 12-bay RackStation, it is totally believable to think that they would do so on the Synology RS1224+. Plus, as this is still an eight-bay system and that too could fully saturate a 10GbE even with hard drives, not just SSD. This is still a lingering question on this system and one that we probably won’t know the answer to until launch, but nevertheless, I think there is enough evidence here for us to wonder if Synology will do the right thing and roll this system out the gate with 10G.

When Do I Think the Synology RS1224+ Rackstation Will Be Released?

Given that the model ID of the RS1224+ and RS1224rp+ both arrive with the ’24’ suffix, that typically means that Synology will roll this system out in the first 6 months of 2024. That is still quite a wide and broad remit for a release date, but typically Synology tends to roll out business and enterprise-grade solutions in the first quarter of the year (based on previous experience and other releases we have observed). Nevertheless, at the time of writing in February 2024, we are making our way into the halfway point of the first quarter of 2024, so Synology would be cutting it quite fine, and we have yet to even see provisional leaks of this system via the usual supply chain and compatibility listings to the degree that we normally would prior to a launch. With regards to pricing, that is one area where Synology tends to be thankfully incredibly consistent, and you can fully expect the RS1224+ to match the $999 to $1199 price tag of its predecessor. Stay tuned to NAS Compares as we keep an eye out for this system and discuss whether it deserves your data.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

The Synology BeeStation NAS Disassembly – Taking it to Pieces

Par : Rob Andrews
14 février 2024 à 18:00

Taking the Synology Beestation Apart to See What is Inside…

Synology is approaching a whole new kind of user with the release of the new BeeStation personal cloud simplified NAS system. For all of the years that we have discussed the Synology NAS platform, very few solutions from the brand have been this hassle-free and easy to use. A lot of this simplification by Synology in BeeStation, DSM, and the system’s approach to storage stems from the system being a far more closed platform than previous DiskStation and rackmount solutions that have come before it. Many more experienced storage veterans and IT specialists wonder about how the Synology BeeStation is put together, how its internal hardware and components differ from traditional DiskStation alternatives, and how exactly the system is managing that inclusive 4TB of storage. So in today’s video, I got my screwdriver out and decided to take apart and completely disassemble the Synology BeeStation 4TB model. If you are reading this article, that is likely because you are either a user on the fence who is considering buying this system and wants to know about how to take it apart in the event of maintenance, or you are a fellow reviewer or tech specialist who wants to use this guide as the means to understand how to take the BeeStation apart. Regardless of who you are, I hope you enjoy this guide and attribute and share it if you find it helpful. Before we delve further, we need to discuss a few disclaimers.

Synology Beestation Disasembly – IMPORTANT WARNING!

This is a really, really important point. Taking apart the Synology BeeStation runs a significant risk of not only damaging your data but also completely nullifying any hardware or software support that Synology will provide you. The BeeStation was designed to be a closed system and not targeted towards higher-end tech enthusiasts, and therefore does not allow the same easy dismantle procedure that you find in the DiskStation range. This Synology BeeStation was provided to me by Synology UK, and I am dismantling the system without their assurance or without their authorization to do so; the same needs to be applied to your own BeeStation system if you intend to follow the steps in this guide to tear down and dismantle it. This system was not designed to be taken apart, and taking it apart may result in the following:

  • You might cause damage to the hard drive inside via static electricity, motion, or physical pressure.
  • The BeeStation casing is an exceptionally tight-fitting enclosure, and dismantling it will almost certainly leave marks and clear indications that you have done so, which will invalidate any hardware support available to you as you have tampered with the system and performed actions that are not covered by the hardware warranty.
  • You run the risk of scratching the internal motherboard, PCB, or delicate components during the dismantling of the BeeStation, which will result in complete system failure at worst and detrimental performance drops at best if this occurs.

Do not proceed with dismantling your Synology BeeStation unless you are happy to run the risk that it may be deemed inoperable or that your support by Synology may cease as a result.

Additionally, the Synology BeeStation includes numerous measures to back up the content of the system’s data and set up to the Synology C2 cloud, a connected USB drive, or at an object file/folder level to third-party cloud services. It is extremely recommended that you have an up-to-the-second backup in place before you attempt any of the steps in this guide. Any data loss resulting from following the steps in this guide is purely at your own discretion, and myself and NAS Compares cannot be held accountable. Bottom line, be aware that what you are doing right now is outside of what this system was supposed to do, and that you are doing so at your own risk. Understand? Good. Let’s get on with dismantling the BeeStation and tear down this cost-effective NAS.

Also, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you read through the steps completely first, before you begin dismantling your BeeStation NAS, as it’s decent bits more layered in the access compared with a normal Diskstation NAS system.

Dismantling the Synology BeeStation Persona Cloud – A Step By Step Guide

First thing you need to do is disconnect all ethernet (LAN), power cables and USB devices and give the system sufficient time to allow the HDD inside to spin down. Then carefully turn the device up and have the base vent panel face up. Again, be CAREFUL as this system features a mechanical HDD inside and that can be susceptible to shock/motion damage.

Next you need to slowly and carefully peel back the rubber foot panel located at the base, at the front of the Beestation (i.e the single LED light side). It is held in place with strong adhesive, but you can replace it back after opening the case up later, as the rubber foot sits in a grooved panel and the adhesive has plenty of reuse!

Under the rubber panel are two Phillips/cross-head screws. There are the ONLY external means to open up the enclosure/casing of the BeeStation.

Remove each of these screws (keep them to one side and make sure to remember they are the base screws, as the system has 2 kinds of screws in it’s construction and mixing them up with rip the screw holes to pieces!

Removing these two scews will allow you to apply a small above of pressure to leverage the front panel of the BeeStation NAS to be removed. Important – do this carefully (that word again!) as the entire casing is made up of 2 pieces and its super easy to crack it in two!

The top part of the front panel is actually an L-shaped panel that has the fully ventilated dust panel attached. Mkae sure that your ease the panel off carefully enough not to break those 4 hooks at the top, as these are what align the top panel with the rest of the casing.

Slight side note, but for those that care about dust build up on 24×7 systems like the BeeStation, this can be quite useful to perform cleaning. Anyway, carrying on!

Next up os removing the Hard Drive that the Beestation Personal Cloud arrives with. The first thing you need to remove is the 2 smaller screws located around the edge of the casing. DO NOT REMOVE THE 2 LARGER SCREWS IN THE MIDDLE!!! These larger screws hold the HDD in place and you need to do this much later, or else risk the drive moving around during the dismantling.

Each screw will be easy to remove, however there are actually 3 more screw located around the base of the framework. They are tricky to reach, and a longer screwdriver would be recommended, but it can be done with an ordinary 15cm + screwdriver will get the job done.

At the front base area, you can find two black Phillips/cross-head screws that you need to remove. You will need to come at there from a slight angle if you only have a short screwdriver. Important – DO NOT USE AN ELECTRIC/AUTOMATIC SCREWDRIVER!!! Notwithstanding that you will tear the soft screw to pieces, you might cause vibration that will be damaging to the HDD next to the screw! Do it the OLD SKOOL way!

The last screw is much harder to spot and reach, it is located at the bottom-back of the enclosure, on the NON-Motherboard side. You will need to come at it from a slight angle, even with a longer screwdriver. Note, you COULD have removed the top panel attached to the HDD in order to get to the screw a little easier, but I personally would rather the HDD remains in an immobile cage throughout this part of the Beestaion teardown. It’s your call!

That is the last screw that you need to remove and , once it is done, you can begin the removal of the HDD clip/cage.

The HDD Clip/cage will slide out sideways (with a little resistance). BE CAREFUL with the removal of the HDD cage/clips, as the right-hand side will have the controller board (which has the heatsink on top of the CPU, and a bare PCB – which can be super susceptible to static and moisture!

One you have removed the HDD Cage tray, you will now have three components on the table:

The one we want to focus on is the HDD tray/cage. Carefully turn it around and lay the drive facedown on the table.

Once the drive is ‘face down’, you need to carefully (yes, THAT word again! Take a drink) remove the two silver screws, Try to touch the blue PCB controller board as little as possible.

Once you have removed those two screws, you need to either slide the controller board away from the Hard drive, or slide the hard drive away. You are doing this to disconnect the SATA connector that is soldered to the controller board. Do NOT leverage the hard drive upwards/downwards, as you run the risk of breaking the connector.

The controller PCB should come away very easily and with little resistance. But before we move forward, it’s worth checking the SATA connector is unharmed.

Take a closer look at the SATA connector. It should look like this:

This is what the storage side of the Synology Beestation BST150 looks like:

The underside of the controller board is where we find a large black heatsink panel that covers the HDD and 1GB DDR4 memory. IMPORTANT – I still have numerous tests to perform on this device for the review, comparison videos and guides for this device. Therefore I am not going to remove this heatsink, as it might result in detrimental performance that will undermine future content.

However, for those that want to know, underneath this heating panel is the Realtek RTD1619b quad core 64bit ARM processor that runs the Synology Beetstation and BSM services, as well as 1GB of DDR4 memory that arrives in presoldered modules on the main PCB. Ther is NOT an kind of SODIMM slot and, given the price and CPU choice in terms of efficiency, this is not a huge surprise.Therefore, memory upgrades on the Synology BeeStation are not possible.

The system software package is delivered via a smaller component that arrives pre-labeled at the factory with the software revision that the BeeStation arrives with. It is worth noting that, as time rolls on, Synology are going to be rolling out numerous firmware updates and (as is the case with the Synology Diskstation/DSM systems) it will update the installer and bootloader package on this chip no doubt.

Each of the physical connections (1GbE RJ45, Power delivery, USB Type A+C and physical buttons) are soldered to the PCB and are not provided on any kid of sister board.

Interesting, Synology have not just cloned and reused the DS124 hardware configuration here (though there are certainly areas of cross over) and instead have designed a whole new PCB layout and scale. The board (model ID and serial identification below) need to factor in the absence of any active cooling system (i.e a fan) on the Beestation, that was present on Diskstation systems like the DS124 and DS223j that arrive with a similar hardware configuration. Equally, this system changes one of the USB ports to Type C and has a very different back port arrangement to spread out.

Next, removing the Hard Drive from itsplastic handles. The HDD is held in place by 4 screws that go directly into the same four screw holes that are usually used by HDD bays on Diskstastion NAS that utilize trays. Ther are four screw in each corner. Important note for later – Make a note of the clips and direction that are on either side of the HDD – whether you want to reassemble this Beestation to the factory build OR you are considering exploring larger HDDs, getting these clips the wrong way around or in the wrong direction will, at best, mean it won’t for back together and you need to redo them, or at WORST, you end up damaging the controller board and casing as you attempt to re-insert the drive.

Each screw uses a counter-sunk system and also arrives with a rubber washer between the screw head and the plastic. This means that you do not need to fully remove the screw, as there is a small % of space left. Regardless, just remove the four screws and each of the side panels should come off very easily.

Once again, make sure you keep track of which panel goes with each side of the HDD – As this will be a right pain during reassembly. An important area of note here is that IF you are considering adding larger/alternative drives to the Beestation and you have your heart set on an SSD, you are going to need a 2.5″ to 3.5″ HDD adapter, as the screw holes that the tray clips AND the PCB Backboard are not available on a 2.5″ SSD. This does also open the door to the potential for a Dual 2.5″ SATA SSD to 3.5″ SATA Adapter case, which would provide the performance benefits of 2x SATA SSD in a RAID 0, or the redundancy benefits of 2x SATA SSDs in a RAID 1, if the case supports internal RAID 0/1). Here are two options:

2.5″ to 3.5″ SATA Adapter ($7.99+)

Find on Amazon HERE

2x SATA 2.5″ SATA to 1x 3.5″ SATA Adapter RAID Caddy (19.99+)

Find on Amazon HERE

However, there is considerably more to adding a new hard drive to the BeeStation than just the physical injection!

This reveals the drive in all it’s glory (in this case, a Synology HAT3300 which is a Seagate Ironwolf NAS HDD with Synology Firmware, but yours might well be the HAT3310, which is a Toshiba N300 drive with Synology FW). At launch, the Synology BeeStation arrived with just a single 4TB option, but no doubt in the further (perhaps when you are reading this) Synology have rolled out bigger HDD options or RAID equipped multi-bay versions.

But, there you go! That is the disassembly of the Synology BeeStation. I hope you enjoyed this guide and found in useful/informative! REMEMBER, I did this to show you what the inside of your BeeStation Personal Cloud looks like, so YOU DON’T HAVE TO! If you have any further questions, you can reach out to me on robbie ( at ) nascompares.com, or use our free advice section located on the right hand side of the page. Alternatively, you can reach us on our Discord HERE, our community forum HERE, or for faster and more personal support over on KoFi Commissions HERE. If you use and/or share the content of this guide online, please help us spread awareness of our platform and the work we do by backlinking us appropriately! Thanks for reading!


Synology BeeStation Personal Cloud Review – Quick Conclusion

READ THE FULL BeeStation Review HERE

Synology has clearly done their homework on the development and presentation of the BeeStation private cloud. They are targeting a whole new audience with this system, and therefore, criticisms based on experiences with their other hardware are likely to fall on deaf ears. The BeeStation is probably one of the best middle grounds I have ever seen between an easy-to-use and exceptionally easy-to-set-up private cloud system, while still managing to provide smooth and seamless features for accessing and sharing your private cloud’s storage securely. Looking at this system with a more network-savvy microscope kind of defeats the point, and I’ve tried to be fair in my assessment. The lack of LAN access by default seems a little odd, and launching the BeeStation series in this single-bay, 4TB-only fashion may be a bit of a marketing misstep, but overall, what you’re seeing here is an effectively priced and scaled private cloud system. It’s a fantastic alternative to third-party clouds and existing simplified NAS systems. With many users keeping an eye on their budgets and tightening costs, Synology, known for its premium position in the market, had a challenge scaling down to this kind of user. However, I have to applaud Synology’s R&D for creating a simple and easy-to-use personal cloud solution that still carries a lot of their charm and great software reputation. It may not be as feature-rich as DSM, but BSM does exactly what it says it will do, and I think the target audience it’s designed for will enjoy the BeeStation a great deal!

SOFTWARE - 7/10
HARDWARE - 8/10
PERFORMANCE - 7/10
PRICE - 10/10
VALUE - 10/10


8.4
PROS
👍🏻User-friendly setup, ideal for beginners or those seeking a simple cloud solution.
👍🏻Secure data handling with encrypted data transmission.
👍🏻Comes with 4TB of storage included, offering good value.
👍🏻Compact and lightweight design, enhancing portability.
👍🏻Quiet operation, suitable for home or office environments.
👍🏻Integrates seamlessly with popular cloud services like Google Drive and OneDrive.
👍🏻Affordable pricing at $199, a cost-effective alternative to third-party cloud services.
👍🏻Supports remote access, allowing data management from anywhere and across client devices/OS
👍🏻Synologys reputation for quality and reliability is still clear on this smaller scale.
👍🏻Several client tools (BeeFiles, BeePhotos and Desktop sync tool) for Windows, Mac, iOS and Android available for tailored access
👍🏻System configuration backup option to USB/C2 (Often absent in budget cloud solutions)
👍🏻AI Photo Recognition in BeePhotos for faces, Objects and geo data scraping + Advanced filter/search
CONS
👎🏻Lacks the extensive app support and customization found in Synology\'s DSM platform.
👎🏻Only available in a single-bay, 4TB configuration at launch, limiting expandability.
👎🏻Single 5400RPM HDD running everything leads to slowdown more than you think!
👎🏻LAN access is disabled by default, which may not suit all users.
👎🏻Designed for a specific user base, may not meet the needs of more advanced users.

Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

DEAL WATCH – Is It On Offer Right Now?


These Offers are Checked Daily

 


📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

« Un conflit avec la Russie ne débuterait pas nécessairement sur le terrain militaire », avertit le premier ministre norvégien

19 février 2024 à 18:21

Lors de la Conférence de Munich sur la sécurité, le Premier ministre norvégien Jonas Gahr Støre a prévenu qu'un conflit avec la Russie commencerait par une déstabilisation avant tout affrontement militaire.

Synology BeeStation Review – The “EASY MODE” NAS?

Par : Rob Andrews
19 février 2024 à 18:00

Synology BeeStation Personal Cloud Review

What IS the BeeStation? Of all the products I’ve spoken about from Synology in nearly 25 years of solutions from the brand, the new BeeStation is possibly one of the most conventional yet surprising they have ever released. We first spoke about the BeeStation, otherwise known as the BST150-4T, halfway through 2023, when we started hearing rumors about Synology’s new entry-level solution that was shaping up to challenge the likes of WD My Cloud and My Book solutions. Synology has been providing impressively capable personal cloud solutions for a considerably long time, but it would be fair to say that for the majority of users who just want a simple cloud solution that is easy even for a child to set up, DSM isn’t quite as straightforward as they would like. The BeeStation and BSM hope to remedy this with Synology providing what is potentially the most user-friendly and easy-to-use personal cloud solution they have ever provided, as well as inviting positive comparisons against the likes of Google Drive and iCloud in terms of price. Roll in the fact that the system already arrives pre-populated with four terabytes of storage and is priced at just $199, and what you find here is one of the biggest brands in the world in network attached storage trying to reinvent the wheel that they themselves had a big part in designing! If you are reading this, it is because you are wondering whether the Synology BeeStation is the perfect fit for your simple, low-scale, and low-cost private cloud. So today, I want to tell you the five reasons why I can highly recommend the Synology BeeStation, as well as providing five reasons why you might want to give it a miss.

Note – You can watch the FULL YouTube Review of the Synology BeeStation HERE

Synology BeeStation Personal Cloud Review – Quick Conclusion

Synology has clearly done their homework on the development and presentation of the BeeStation private cloud. They are targeting a whole new audience with this system, and therefore, criticisms based on experiences with their other hardware are likely to fall on deaf ears. The BeeStation is probably one of the best middle grounds I have ever seen between an easy-to-use and exceptionally easy-to-set-up private cloud system, while still managing to provide smooth and seamless features for accessing and sharing your private cloud’s storage securely. Looking at this system with a more network-savvy microscope kind of defeats the point, and I’ve tried to be fair in my assessment. The lack of LAN access by default seems a little odd, and launching the BeeStation series in this single-bay, 4TB-only fashion may be a bit of a marketing misstep, but overall, what you’re seeing here is an effectively priced and scaled private cloud system. It’s a fantastic alternative to third-party clouds and existing simplified NAS systems. With many users keeping an eye on their budgets and tightening costs, Synology, known for its premium position in the market, had a challenge scaling down to this kind of user. However, I have to applaud Synology’s R&D for creating a simple and easy-to-use personal cloud solution that still carries a lot of their charm and great software reputation. It may not be as feature-rich as DSM, but BSM does exactly what it says it will do, and I think the target audience it’s designed for will enjoy the BeeStation a great deal!

SOFTWARE - 7/10
HARDWARE - 8/10
PERFORMANCE - 7/10
PRICE - 10/10
VALUE - 10/10


8.4
PROS
👍🏻User-friendly setup, ideal for beginners or those seeking a simple cloud solution.
👍🏻Secure data handling with encrypted data transmission.
👍🏻Comes with 4TB of storage included, offering good value.
👍🏻Compact and lightweight design, enhancing portability.
👍🏻Quiet operation, suitable for home or office environments.
👍🏻Integrates seamlessly with popular cloud services like Google Drive and OneDrive.
👍🏻Affordable pricing at $199, a cost-effective alternative to third-party cloud services.
👍🏻Supports remote access, allowing data management from anywhere and across client devices/OS
👍🏻Synologys reputation for quality and reliability is still clear on this smaller scale.
👍🏻Several client tools (BeeFiles, BeePhotos and Desktop sync tool) for Windows, Mac, iOS and Android available for tailored access
👍🏻System configuration backup option to USB/C2 (Often absent in budget cloud solutions)
👍🏻AI Photo Recognition in BeePhotos for faces, Objects and geo data scraping + Advanced filter/search
CONS
👎🏻Lacks the extensive app support and customization found in Synology\'s DSM platform.
👎🏻Only available in a single-bay, 4TB configuration at launch, limiting expandability.
👎🏻Single 5400RPM HDD running everything leads to slowdown more than you think!
👎🏻LAN access is disabled by default, which may not suit all users.
👎🏻Designed for a specific user base, may not meet the needs of more advanced users.


Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?


These Offers are Checked Daily


Synology BeeStation Review – Packaging and Presentation

The BeeStation arrives in fairly modest packaging that, although is pretty comparable to the majority of other Synology NAS solutions in the market, I will highlight that it arrives with a four-terabyte hard drive pre-installed. Consequently, I’m a little surprised that the packaging was not just a little bit more robust.

As petty as this sounds, I appreciate that this is an affordable item and indeed, unlike a number of the other solutions which are going to be exclusively retail biased, this one has a higher possibility of being purchased over the counter and therefore protection isn’t quite as necessary for logistics as perhaps their other solutions are. Nevertheless, shock and motion damage in transit is a genuine real thing, and unlike a number of their other solutions that arrive in pre-cut foam packaging, this system is only held in place by a single-layer framework of cardboard. Not terrible, but not exactly great for a pre-populated NAS system. The kit arrives with the BeeStation system itself, a modest external power supply, an RJ45 Ethernet cable, and information on first-time setup and the inclusive 3-year warranty.

The external power supply is fantastically modest and comparable to that of other one by Synology NAS systems. This is an efficiently powered system that runs on an ARM 64-bit processor and with only a single hard drive inside, power consumption is going to be exceptionally low and therefore the max PSU power really doesn’t need to be that much. Additionally, the PSU features regional power clips. It’s a shame that they do not also include regional clips for other areas, as some people may be deploying this system in different places on the go because of its lightness and portability, but I understand why Synology probably doesn’t entertain this and continues to add further e-waste to the potential.

Overall, I can’t really fault the retail kit here; it’s providing everything you’re going to need to deploy this straight out of the box and up and running within 2 to 3 minutes. Even more so than any other Synology solution as this one even includes the storage media pre-populated with firmware already pre-configured for that specific drive. I do wish the retail packaging was a little bit more protective, but again this is a relatively minor point for a solution that’s $199 all in. Let’s discuss the hardware and design.

Specification Details
Capacity 4TB
Processor Realtek RTD1619B
Memory 1GB DDR4
LAN Port 1 x 1GbE RJ-45
External Ports 1 x USB-A 3.2 Gen 1, 1 x USB-C 3.2 Gen 1
Dimensions (HxWxD) 148.0 x 62.6 x 196.3mm
Weight 820g
Supported Browsers Google Chrome®, Firefox®, Microsoft Edge®, Safari® 14+
System Requirements Windows 10 64-bit (build 19041+), Windows 11, macOS 12.3+
Mobile Apps iOS 15+, Android 8+
Certifications RoHS, FCC, CE, BSMI, RCM, EAC, UKCA, KC, VCCI
Package Contents BeeStation unit, AC adapter, RJ-45 cable, Quick start guide
Warranty 3 years

Synology BeeStation Review – Design and Connectivity

Synology could have easily reused one of their existing hardware chassis from the DiskStation series when creating the BeeStation. However, the BeeStation is a completely unique and new chassis to the Synology product family and is one of the smallest enclosures they have ever released, especially when you factor in that it’s arriving with a 3.5-inch SATA hard drive already pre-installed.

The device has the Synology Bee logo adorned on either side, with ventilation on the base and the top panels. Cooling isn’t too much of an issue on this rather modest specification system. And thanks to the absence of any kind of SSD internally, rising temperatures are not really going to be a tremendous amount of concern, even in 24/7 operations. Indeed, the top ventilation panel cannot be removed and has a metal panel underneath to filter air as it passes through the system. Synology states on numerous official pages that it is not possible to deconstruct this system without fundamentally damaging the external casing and undermining the ventilation and cooling system.

As the BeeStation only holds a single hard drive internally, there is a decent enough argument here that trays or features such as hot swapping are going to be largely useless, given the entirety of the system. Storage and services are running from that lone drive and its removal would immediately compromise the system. However, it is worth remembering that the HAT3300 or HAT3310 Synology 5400 RPM hard drive is the only drive you can use in this system and Synology does not endorse the usage of third-party drives in this system.

Indeed, the Synology software for this system that arrives with all of the packages pre-installed, after a little bit of digging, shows that it is seemingly locked to a Synology drive. No doubt more enterprising users will be able to migrate this over to a third-party hard drive, potentially undermining any hardware or software support by Synology, but you can largely guarantee there will be users doing this. 4TB is perhaps too low a glass ceiling for many users.

Returning to the subject of design, though. You really cannot fault the scale of this system. And thanks to its low power and low stature, it is largely silent when in operation any noticeable noise and not Synology’s sign of the BeeStation.

The front of the system displays a single LED that denotes when the system is powered on. It’s likely to announce whether the BeeStation is in setup mode, normal usage, or if there is an error that needs addressing (the system also has the expected audio beep for notifications and warnings). There’s no front-mounted USB, but the system does have USB ports and more on the rear. The rear of the system shows some fairly entry-level ports and connections, but for the $199 price point and rather modest audience this system is aimed towards, there isn’t too much to fault here.

The BeeStation features two USB 3.2 Gen. 1, 5 Gbps ports, including Type A and Type C. These ports can be used to connect external USB storage to the BeeStation, and access to this storage is immediately accessible via the Bee Files software user interface on desktop and mobile.

Additionally, BeeStation Manager also includes the means to backup the whole system storage to a connected USB via the system settings interface, as well as a more tactile and customizable individual object file finder backup option in Bee Files. Numerous USB backups can be created, scheduled, and several filters applied to ensure that only important or necessary files are backed up when needed.

Much like Synology DSM, there is also the option for a backup to be actioned automatically when a selected USB is connected to the system and auto-dismounted when the job is completed. The Beestation is a 1-Bay and the result is that although these USBs can be used to add external storage or backup storage, they cannot be used to add any kind of expansion and expand the original storage while maintaining existing share paths for remote access users.

The notable physical connection is the network connection, a 1GbE network port that serves as the only remote access point for this system. Previously, I have criticized Synology for continuing the use of 1 GbE network ports when the majority of their competitors, even at this price point, have started rolling out 2.5 GbE as standard, and given the 2.5x network performance bandwidth and relative inexpense at the production level between these two connections, it’s understandable that users may be annoyed. However, this is a system running on a single hard drive that is already going to suffer occasional drops in performance when simultaneous access is happening. Equally, the modest Realtek CPU inside this system is not really hugely well equipped to spread itself out across the hardware configuration on offer and still maintain that same level of efficiency and capability. Therefore, I’m not hugely surprised that Synology has opted for 1GbE on this modest BeeStation system, but do be aware that this will bottleneck the potential 180 to 200 megabytes per second performance that a hard drive like this is capable of.

Synology has clearly tried to differentiate the BeeStation series from their existing DiskStation range of prosumer and business devices, and the design we’re seeing here is certainly a great way to do this. Yes, we’re not exactly looking at hardware that will absolutely blow your mind, but for $199 once again, we are looking at a very well-put-together and quality feeling product from a brand that already has a well-established reputation for these things to maintain. Let’s discuss the hardware inside this device and what keeps this thing moving!

Synology BeeStation Review – Internal Hardware

Despite these Synology BeeStation arriving at a very modest scale, they equip this device with the same CPU found inside the majority of their Value and J series boxes. In the comparisons that I have previously made between the BeeStation and the WD My Cloud series, it is worth remembering that Western Digital was always quite conservative when it came to the hardware on their personal cloud systems. WD still provides exceedingly low-powered dual-core 32-bit ARM Marvell processors that, in 2024, are really showing their age. By comparison, this Synology BeeStation arrives with a 64-bit ARM processor, featuring quad-core and also coming with 1GB of DDR4 memory. This is the same CPU found in the one-bay DS124 and 2-bay DS223, but the way the BeeStation utilizes this hardware is notably different from that of its arguably more fully-featured DiskStation alternative.

This CPU is actually capable of doing a great many more things than what the BeeStation and BSM offer, but does provide a very robust and comparatively more powerful base for these more streamlined operations than what is found by other cost-effective alternatives on the market.

The system also arrives with 1GB of DDR4 memory that, again, is double that found in the majority of more budget NAS systems, and given this system only supports up to eight simultaneous active users, 1GB of DDR4 memory is definitely more than enough to handle the comparatively simplistic photo, file management, and backup operations largely associated with this system. This memory is not upgradable, delivered via direct-soldered chips on the internal motherboard, but the CPU is not especially good at handling memory in larger quantities anyway (I believe the maximum supported memory by the processor is 4GB), and thus, this good base level memory and CPU are only really let down by one thing about this system – the single SATA hard drive inside!

As mentioned earlier, this system running from a single SATA hard drive presents quite large challenges with regards to multiple operations at any given time. Those eight maximum simultaneous users have plenty of CPU processing power and memory to divide between them, but a single SATA hard drive is going to struggle massively with up to eight users and their individual file processing demands at any given time. This is precisely the reason that users migrated away from hard drives for running operating systems, favoring the use of SSDs, as hard drives simply do not stand up well to the rigours of simultaneous input/output in 2024. So, once again, a complete bummer!

Examining the internal hardware on the BeeStation feels a little overzealous, given the target audience. This system is designed for being by their very nature, less tech-spec interested. I have to give Synology tremendous credit for constructing a much more powerful option in the personal cloud space than the majority of other vendors competing for this tier of the market. Now, I just wish for storage options, RAID options, and just generally better scaling options for buyers at launch. But it’s not about what you’ve got, right? It’s about what you do with it! Let’s discuss the software and services of the BeeStation.

Synology BeeStation Review – BSM Software, BeeFiles and BeePhotos

Synology has impressively reimagined their premium DSM software experience, streamlining it to introduce the more user-friendly BeeStation Manager (BSM) package. At launch, BSM offers a complete web-based GUI accessible via web browsers, a downloadable client tool for Windows or Mac systems for synchronized OS file management, and two mobile applications: BeeFiles and BeePhotos.

The user experience and software suite available for engaging with their private cloud on the BeeStation are categorized into three main areas: system management, file management, and photo management, starting with system management, which can be the most daunting aspect for users transitioning from public cloud services.

System Management

The setup process is notably user-friendly, marking one of the best NAS experiences in my extensive data storage career. Initially, you activate the device, connect it to a network, and proceed to the Synology online BeeStation portal to create a user account. This process, which includes entering the device’s serial number, downloading the latest firmware, and creating a user account, is streamlined and efficient, enabling a fully operational personal cloud setup in under three minutes.

The web management interface, although simpler compared to Synology’s DSM, emphasizes simplicity for home users and individuals moving away from cloud services, making it deliberately sparse yet functional.

Main Command Interface

The initial interface displays available storage and the allocation of storage types, offering features such as inviting additional users to your shared space. With hardware not designed for heavy-duty use, akin to Synology’s J series NAS, it supports adding up to eight users through an invitation system via the online portal.

Backup and Support

BSM includes simplified system backup options, using either a local USB drive or Synology’s C2 cloud service for offsite backups, with additional backup capabilities through BeeFiles. This feature underscores the importance of data security and system configuration preservation.

Alert settings for system events, such as unauthorized access attempts and storage issues, are standard, ensuring users are informed of system status and security. For hardware issues, BeeStation allows remote device access by Synology support, requiring user-generated unique keys, ensuring user consent before support can intervene.

Technical and LAN Access

The system defaults to disabling LAN access, a point of contention given its implications for local network performance versus internet-based access. This decision, aimed at simplifying security for less technical users, may limit user experience under certain conditions.

BeeFiles and BeePhotos

BeeFiles offers a straightforward approach to accessing storage, akin to services like Google Drive or Dropbox, with apps for web, mobile, and desktop use, enabling easy file management and sharing among up to eight users.

BeePhotos provides a dedicated platform for photo and video management, incorporating AI for facial and object recognition to enhance photo cataloging and search functionality, though it has room for improvement in object recognition specificity.

Performance and Optimization

The system’s reliance on a single 4TB 5400 RPM hard drive limits its performance, especially in high-demand operations like indexing and thumbnail generation. This highlights a potential area for future optimization and hardware upgrades to enhance user experience.

In summary, while the BeeStation system demonstrates a polished software experience and presents a functional and cost-effective alternative to cloud services, its performance and hardware limitations are areas poised for future improvements. As Synology expands the BeeStation hardware lineup, users can anticipate enhanced functionality and value from these tools.

Synology BeeStation Review – Verdict and Conclusion

The Synology BeeStation marks a significant shift in Synology’s product line, targeting a new segment of users with its simplified yet functional design. This device stands out as an excellent middle ground between ease of use and a comprehensive private cloud system, providing secure and seamless access to stored data. While it is incredibly user-friendly and easy to set up, the lack of LAN access by default and its single-bay, 4TB-only configuration at launch might limit its appeal to more tech-savvy users or those seeking greater flexibility and expandability. The BeeStation’s unique selling point is its simplicity, making it a compelling choice for those new to NAS systems or for users who prioritize ease of use over extensive customization options. However, its simplicity also means that it lacks the extensive app support found in Synology’s DSM platform, potentially disappointing users accustomed to the richer application ecosystem offered by Synology’s more advanced models.

For users concerned about security, the BeeStation still upholds Synology’s reputation for secure data handling, with encrypted data transmission as a standard feature. However, experienced users who prefer a more hands-on approach to their NAS setup might find the BeeStation’s lack of advanced configuration options and its reliance on internet access for setup somewhat restrictive. In terms of market positioning, the BeeStation fills a gap left by other brands like WD and Seagate in offering ‘Easy NAS’ systems. Its competitive pricing, particularly considering the included 4TB of storage, makes it an attractive option for users seeking a private cloud solution without the recurring costs associated with third-party cloud services. Despite these potential drawbacks, the BeeStation is a solid entry-level NAS solution, especially for those seeking a personal cloud with minimal setup and maintenance. It may not be as feature-rich as Synology’s DSM-based NAS devices, but for its intended audience, the BeeStation provides a well-balanced combination of functionality, ease of use, and affordability. Synology’s move to cater to a broader, less technically inclined audience with the BeeStation demonstrates their understanding of market trends and user needs, offering a solution that balances simplicity with the reliability and quality Synology is known for.

In the end, the Synology BeeStation is an ideal choice for users seeking a straightforward, reliable, and cost-effective personal cloud solution. It represents Synology’s commitment to diversifying their product range, catering to the evolving needs of different user segments. While it may not suit everyone, especially those looking for advanced features and customization, it excels in its role as a user-friendly, secure, and affordable entry-level NAS device.

 

Synology Beestation 4TB PROS Synology Beestation 4TB CONS
User-friendly setup, ideal for beginners or those seeking a simple cloud solution.

Secure data handling with encrypted data transmission.

Comes with 4TB of storage included, offering good value.

Compact and lightweight design, enhancing portability.

Quiet operation, suitable for home or office environments.

Integrates seamlessly with popular cloud services like Google Drive and OneDrive.

Affordable pricing at $199, a cost-effective alternative to third-party cloud services.

Supports remote access, allowing data management from anywhere and across client devices/OS’.

Synology’s reputation for quality and reliability is still clear on this smaller scale.

Lacks the extensive app support and customization found in Synology’s DSM platform.

Only available in a single-bay, 4TB configuration at launch, limiting expandability.

LAN access is disabled by default, which may not suit all users.

Designed for a specific user base, may not meet the needs of more advanced users.

If you are thinking of buying a Synology NAS, please use the links below as it results in us at NASCompares receiving an affiliate fee from Amazon:
Need More Help Choosing the right NAS?

Choosing the right data storage solution for your needs can be very intimidating and it’s never too late to ask for help. With options ranging from NAS to DAS, Thunderbolt to SAS and connecting everything up so you can access all your lovely data at the touch of a button can be a lot simpler than you think. If you want some tips, guidance or help with everything from compatibility to suitability of a solution for you, why not drop me a message below and I will get back to you as soon as possible with what you should go for, its suitability and the best place to get it. This service is designed without profit in mind and in order to help you with your data storage needs, so I will try to answer your questions as soon as possible.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS – Should You Buy?

Par : Rob Andrews
28 février 2024 à 18:00

Does the Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS Deserve Your Data?

Today, we’re taking a closer look at the Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS. This review is also partnered with a YouTube video (HERE) and unlike our full review, this article is focused on helping you understand as quickly as possible whether the F4-424 Pro NAS is the right server for your needs. We have been covering the subject of Terra master NAS for several years and I think it would be fair to say that they are largely considered the ‘cost effective’ option in the NAS market. However in the last generation they made some huge changes to their systems and services. First scaling up the feature set of their TOS NAS platform (currently TOS 5.1, with TOS 6 in very early alpha) to include alot more of the popular requirements of modern Synology NAS users, including BTRFS, Flexible RAID configurations, AI powered photo tools, comprehensive backup tools, etc. Meanwhile, they continued to provide the same level of hardware as alternatives from QNAP and Asustor, such as 2.5GbE, M.2 NVMe Support, HDMI 2.0, newer CPUs, and more. Fast forward to the 2024 generation and we have their latest series, the F4-X24 series. Drawing first blood in terms of hardware over its rivals, its rocking out the gate with the Intel i3-N300 CPU 8 Core Processor and 32GB DDR5 Memory (with a more affordable Intel N95 version and less memory), they were the first to roll out a 2024 generation of devices.

Design Improvements

The Terramaster F4-424 Pro boasts significant design improvements over its predecessors. It features a more modern and streamlined chassis with better ventilation, improved drive trays, and easier access to internal components. Unlike the F4-423, which had a somewhat dated design with minimal ventilation and plastic trays, the F4-424 Pro offers a more robust build. The new design includes flush front-side ventilation, a Terramaster logo panel, and a single rear fan replacing the older model’s clunky dual fans. This redesign not only enhances aesthetics but also improves component accessibility and cooling efficiency.

The ease of accessing the NAS’s internals is a notable enhancement. With just two screws, users can remove the side panel to access the memory slot and M.2 NVMe slots. This feature contrasts sharply with the F4-423, where accessing the motherboard for upgrades was a cumbersome process. The new design clearly borrows successful elements from industry leaders like Synology and QNAP, positioning it as a competitive player in the market.

Impressive CPU and Memory

The heart of the F4-424 Pro is its Intel N300 processor, an 8-core, 8-thread CPU with a base speed of 1.8 GHz, capable of boosting up to 3.8 GHz. This processor sets a high benchmark for mid-range NAS devices, offering integrated graphics superior to many competitors. It also maintains a low 7-watt TDP, striking a balance between performance and energy efficiency.

The NAS comes equipped with 32 GB of DDR5 memory, a notable increase over many similar-priced NAS models in the market. While this exceeds the manufacturer’s stated maximum stable memory, Terramaster assures that their testing validates this configuration. This impressive combination of CPU and memory positions the F4-424 Pro as a strong contender for those seeking a mid-range NAS with high-end hardware capabilities.

Terramaster Operating System (TOS)

TOS, now in version 5.1, has evolved significantly, offering a range of fundamental and mid-level features. While it may not compete directly with the likes of Synology DSM or QNAP QTS in terms of application range, TOS focuses on getting the basics right. It includes multi-site backup options, a flexible RAID storage system, and support for both EXT4 and BTRFS file systems. Click the video below and you will be skipped ahead to the full section on TOS 5.1:

The system also boasts AI-powered photo recognition, a developing surveillance application, and multimedia streaming apps. While the lack of specific apps like a dedicated video station may be a downside for some, Terramaster compensates by providing an all-in-one mobile app and desktop interface that are user-friendly and accessible.

SSD and HDD Support

The F4-424 Pro allows for the installation of NVMe SSDs (Gen 3) in its M.2 slots, offering flexibility in utilizing these as storage pools or intelligent caching. This feature surpasses some competitors who restrict SSD usage or brand compatibility. The NAS supports a broad range of hard drives, up to 22 TB from Seagate and WD, without the restrictive compatibility issues seen in some other brands.

Plex Media Server Performance

The F4-424 Pro excels as a Plex Media Server, handling 4K media transcoding and playback with ease and even supporting early 8K performance. The NAS’s ability to handle high-resolution media without being the bottleneck in the system is a significant plus for users looking to future-proof their media streaming capabilities.

Potential to Upgrade towards TrueNAS Core, Scale and UnRAID

The F4-424 Pro currently drives with arguablely the BEST internal hardware of any 4-Bay Turnkey NAS released in the market so far. However, some users would much rather use the much longer established TrueNAS and UnRAID alternatives in the market. Whether that is because of hefty industry recommendation, or because of previous experience, some users might not want to be locked into using the software that a Turnkey NAS arrives with. So, it will definitely please some users that not only can you VERY EASILY install TrueNAS/UnRAID on the Terrmaster F4-424 Pro (or indeed any Terrmaster that features an x86 CPU). Even more, Terramaster have even made it official online that although they do not encourage users to do this, they will not deny any warranty claims from users who perform this OS change – something a few other brands have been quick to deny. Below is a walkthrough of just how easy it is to install TrueNAS CORE on a Terramaster NAS:

Note – I made a written step-by-step guide to Installing TrueNAS Core HERE. As well as another Video Guide HERE on running UnRAID on any Terramaster x86 NAS, as well as a written guide HERE

There will be users who say that it is cheaper and more flexible to build a server from scratch for TrueNAS or UnRAID, but there are also users who would much rather a ready made hardware solution that has a single warranty to follow, zero build time and already physically designed for 24×7 storage out the gate.

As good as all these sounds though, it is worth keeping in mind that the Terramaster F4-424 Pro is NOT going to be a solution that suits everyone, so let’s go through some of the reasons why you might want to give this NAS a miss.

Reasons to Maybe Skip the Terramaster F4-424 Pro

Nothing is perfect, and much like any other home server system, the F4-424 Pro is not going to be for everybody! To maintain the hardware vs value price point, some compromises were definitely made. Let’s discuss some reasons why the F4-424 Pro might not be ideal for your needs!

Lack of 10GbE Connectivity

One significant drawback is the absence of 10GbE connectivity. Despite its powerful hardware, the F4-424 Pro is limited to 2.5GbE ports. This limitation may hinder its performance in environments where higher network speeds are essential, particularly for users looking to maximize the potential of the NAS’s robust CPU.

Higher Price Point

The F4-424 Pro’s pricing, ranging from $599 to $699, positions it at a higher bracket compared to similar 4-bay NAS models. While it offers a better CPU and more memory, the price difference might not justify the incremental hardware improvements for some users, especially considering the lack of 10GbE.

Limited Range of Client Applications

Terramaster focuses more on hardware than software, resulting in a limited range of client applications for various platforms. This limitation might not suit users looking for a more tailored experience for specific services like video or photo management.

Memory Capacity Concerns

The NAS comes with 32 GB of memory, exceeding the CPU manufacturer’s recommended maximum of 16 GB. While Terramaster assures its functionality, this might raise concerns about long-term stability and performance, especially since this configuration is not standard in the industry.

Past Security Issues

Terramaster was previously impacted by the Deadbolt ransomware attack. While they have since improved security measures, it’s crucial for potential buyers to consider this history when evaluating the long-term security and reliability of the NAS.

Conclusion

The Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS offers a compelling combination of design, performance, and features, making it an excellent choice for many users. However, its higher price, lack of 10GbE, and other considerations might make it less appealing for some.

Pros and Cons

Aspect Pros Cons
Design Modern chassis, improved ventilation Only available in 4 bay with this configuration (2 Bay used N95 CPU)
Hardware Powerful CPU, ample memory Higher price; lack of 10GbE
Software User-friendly TOS Limited client applications
Storage Versatile SSD/HDD support M.2 NVMe slots limited in speed (i.e x2 or X1)
Plex Performance Excellent for 4K and early 8K Still requires Plex Pass to use H/W transcoding
Security Improved post-Deadbolt Past ransomware impact

TerraMaster F4-424 Pro NAS Review – Quick Conclusion

The TerraMaster F4-424 Pro NAS is a powerful 4-bay system with an Intel i3 N300 CPU, 32GB DDR5 memory, and 2x M.2 NVMe SSD bays, offering impressive performance for tasks like Plex media streaming and transcoding. Its redesigned chassis, resembling Synology and QNAP models, improves cooling and accessibility, marking a significant design upgrade. TOS 5 software enhances GUI clarity, backup tools, storage options, and security. The absence of 10GbE and memory limitations are notable drawbacks. Nevertheless, it offers great value in the 4-bay NAS market, appealing to budget-conscious users seeking capable private server solutions.

SOFTWARE - 7/10
HARDWARE - 8/10
PERFORMANCE - 9/10
PRICE - 10/10
VALUE - 10/10


8.8
PROS
👍🏻Powerful Hardware:** Equipped with an Intel i3 N300 CPU and 32GB DDR5 memory, delivering robust performance.
👍🏻Redesigned Chassis:** Improved design for better cooling, hot-swapping, and internal accessibility.
👍🏻TOS 5 Software:** TerraMaster\'s TOS 5 software offers a clear GUI, enhanced backup tools, expanded storage options, and improved security features.
👍🏻Affordable Price:** Competitive pricing under $699 makes it an attractive option for its hardware and software capabilities.
👍🏻Flexible RAID Support:** Supports various RAID configurations, including TRAID for flexible disk array setup.
👍🏻Multiple Client Sync:** TerraSync tool efficiently synchronizes data across multiple users and devices.
👍🏻CCTV Surveillance:** Surveillance Manager offers video recording and monitoring features for added security.
👍🏻AI Photo Recognition:** Terra Photos uses AI algorithms to classify and manage photos effectively.
CONS
👎🏻No 10GbE Support:** Lacks 10GbE support, potentially limiting network speed for some users.
👎🏻Memory Over-specification:** The inclusion of 32GB memory may raise concerns, given the CPU\'s maximum support of 16GB.
👎🏻Limited Packaging Quality:** Packaging and presentation are basic and may not match the standards of competitors.


Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

 

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Synology BeeStation Hard Drive Upgrade – A Step By Step Guide

Par : Rob Andrews
8 mars 2024 à 15:00

How to Upgrade the Hard Drive in Your BeeStation

Why Would You want to change the hard drive in the Synology Beestation? Whether you are an existing owner of the Synology Beestation or a potential NAS buyer who is considering moving away from public cloud services onto your own personal cloud, the Beestastion and BSM provide a fantastically user-friendly alternative to the Synology Diskstation and DSM solutions that the brand has been releasing for almost 25 years. The Beestation can be set up in minutes, sets up all the apps, storage and services in 3 clicks and is BY FAR the most user-friendly NAS system I have ever used! However, it DOES have 1 weakness… one rather sizable Achilles heel… THAT 4TB hard drive inside! The Synology Beestation (At launch – so that might change as time goes on) arrives with a single 4TB Synology HAT3300/3310 5400RPM Hard Drive for storing all your data. This can lead to a lower glass ceiling when it comes to your long-term storage – fun fact, The latest iPhone Pro models supports upto 48MP Apple ProRAW images, which captures more dynamic range at the cost of much larger files, around 75MB for each image. That would still allow just under 60,000 images on a 4TB drives – but once you factor in video backups, PC backups and more, 4TB of capacity is actually going to run out quicker than you think, especially if you connect the maximum 8 supported users. Then there is the performance barrier of a single 5400RPM HDD. Hardware are not great for larger simultaneous input/outputs (e.g lots of individual write operation tasks happening at the same time) and the response times and smoothness of the BSM/BeeStation experience will be diminished. You are also losing out on RAID failover, something that is largely unavailable in a 1 bay, but short of using a dual drive cage adapter (more on that later on) this is unavoidable.

This brings us neatly back around to the subject of changing the HDD inside the Synology Beestation to something with a higher capacity, maybe a Pro series drive with 7200RPM and more cache. or perhaps even a faster SSD instead of an HDD? Synology has not allowed this system to support hot swapping or easy accessibility to the drive media (understandable, as a 1 Bay system). Synology have released this device as an entry-level product that is not designed for more specialized use, so providing the means to upgrade the media and migrate system processes over to a new drive is NOT a straightforward process. Additionally, we should also take some time to discuss the risks and Synology’s position on this.

IMPORTANT WARNING!

This is a really, really important point. Taking apart the Synology BeeStation runs a significant risk of not only damaging your data but also completely nullifying any hardware or software support that Synology will provide you. The BeeStation was designed to be a closed system and not targeted towards higher-end tech enthusiasts, and therefore does not allow the same easy dismantle procedure that you find in the DiskStation range. This Synology BeeStation was provided to me by Synology UK, and I am dismantling the system without their assurance or without their authorization to do so; the same needs to be applied to your own BeeStation system if you intend to follow the steps in this guide to tear down and dismantle it. This system was not designed to be taken apart, and taking it apart may result in the following:

  • You might cause damage to the hard drive inside via static electricity, motion, or physical pressure
  • The Beestation uses a passive cooling system and strategic heatsinks around the internal components, allowing the system to be low noise thanks to a lack of active cooling fan. But changing the storage media inside might compromise this passive cooling system and therefore lead to unpredictable internal system temps or a detrimental effect of the system as a whole.
  • The BeeStation casing is an exceptionally tight-fitting enclosure, and dismantling it will almost certainly leave marks and clear indications that you have done so, which will invalidate any hardware support available to you as you have tampered with the system and performed actions that are not covered by the hardware warranty.
  • You run the risk of scratching the internal motherboard, PCB, or delicate components during the dismantling of the BeeStation, which will result in complete system failure at worst and detrimental performance drops at best if this occurs.

Do not proceed with dismantling your Synology BeeStation unless you are happy to run the risk that it may be deemed inoperable or that your support by Synology may cease as a result.

Additionally, the Synology BeeStation includes numerous measures to back up the content of the system’s data and set up to the Synology C2 cloud, a connected USB drive, or at an object file/folder level to third-party cloud services. It is extremely recommended that you have an up-to-the-second backup in place before you attempt any of the steps in this guide. Any data loss resulting from following the steps in this guide is purely at your own discretion, and myself and NAS Compares cannot be held accountable. Bottom line, be aware that what you are doing right now is outside of what this system was supposed to do, and that you are doing so at your own risk. Understand? Good. Let’s get on with dismantling the BeeStation and tear down this cost-effective NAS.

Also, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you read through the steps completely first, before you begin dismantling your BeeStation NAS, as it’s decent bits more layered in the access compared with a normal Diskstation NAS system.

What Do You Need for this Guide

There are actually not too many things needed for upgrading your Synology BeeStation Drive. I recommend the following:

  • A Synology BeeStation (duh?)
  • A SATA HDD (or SATA 2.5″ SSD with 3.5″ physical Adapter – EXAMPLE)
  • A crosshead Phillip screw driver – the longer the better!
  • The Synology Assistant Client Tool for Windows, Mac or Linux (installed on a system that is on the same local area network as the Beestation) – HERE
  • A downloaded copy of the latest Synology BSM Software .pat file – Download it HERE

The Firmware is optional, as it depends on the upgrade path you choose, but it doesn’t hurt to have it downloaded and ready.

BACKUP YOUR DATA FIRST – How To Backup Your Beestation Personal Cloud NAS

It is INCREDIBLY important that you backup any important data that is already on your Synology Beestation, as the process of installing a new HDD or SSD into the system will result in it replacing the original 4TB HDD. Luckily, there are a couple of great options for backing up your data for restoration when your new HDD/SSD is up and running. The most extensive (and large) one that will ultimately save you time later re-creating shares and folder structure is using the system backup in the System Configuration menu. This allows you to create a full system backup to either the Synology C2 Cloud (subscription cloud service, but does include a trial period) or to a connected USB drive. Later in the guide, I will explain how to restore a full USB backup.

Alternatively, if you are not especially fussed about the system configuration and want a more file/folder-specific backup that only backs up the core/important data (ie you don’t have/want a 4TB backup, but just want some select files/folders), you can use the USB Backup or Cloud Backup options in Beefiles. These are chiefly designed to backup an area of storage from a 3rd Party Cloud (Google Drive, Dropbox or OneDrive) or USB with a specific BeeFiles Folder (you can create multiple). This also has the feature of ensuring the data is 2 way synchronized, which means you CAN use this to copy data form the NAS to the Cloud/USB automatically.

Personally, I would recommend using the System level backup if you can ensure you have a large enough C2 Storage/USB. But also, you should have at least TWO copies of your data, as the system level backup will be in a Synology BSM/Beestation format and will only work in another Beestation system – it won’t be visible via a traditional DAS/Direct connect method.

The last thing to discuss before we begin the Hardware portion of this guide is how you wish to disconnect from the BeeStation system. Installing a new HDD/SSD will also require the system to be formatted. This will happen during the re-initialization when you install a new drive, so you have two options before this. The first is to unlink the Beestation from your Synology Account (as the system is connected via a serial number to your synology account). You will then reconnect with it later on during re-initialization. The main benefit of this method is that Unlinking with the system will KEEP your data on the 4TB hard drive inside – which means if you need to reverse all this (or even just want the old data as a OS-level backup of sorts), this process will be easier and ensure your data is still in place.

Alternatively, you can opt to just fully factory reset the whole device, which will not only disconnect your Synology Account but also delete all the data from the 4TB Hard Drive. After you have chosen the option that suits your needs. Safely power down the device via the GUI or after the system restore. Then you need to leave the system alone for a few minutes (to allow the 4TB HDD to spin down) and then disconnect all USB, Ethernet and power cables.

How To Upgrade Your Beestation HDD – The Start

First thing you need to do is disconnect all ethernet (LAN), power cables and USB devices and give the system sufficient time to allow the HDD inside to spin down. Then carefully turn the device up and have the base vent panel face up. Again, be CAREFUL as this system features a mechanical HDD inside and that can be susceptible to shock/motion damage.

Next you need to slowly and carefully peel back the rubber foot panel located at the base, at the front of the Beestation (i.e the single LED light side). It is held in place with strong adhesive, but you can replace it back after opening the case up later, as the rubber foot sits in a grooved panel and the adhesive has plenty of reuse!

Under the rubber panel are two Phillips/cross-head screws. There are the ONLY external means to open up the enclosure/casing of the BeeStation.

Remove each of these screws (keep them to one side and make sure to remember they are the base screws, as the system has 2 kinds of screws in it’s construction and mixing them up with rip the screw holes to pieces!

Removing these two screws will allow you to apply a small above of pressure to leverage the front panel of the BeeStation NAS to be removed. Important – do this carefully (that word again!) as the entire casing is made up of 2 pieces and it’s super easy to crack it in two!

The top part of the front panel is actually an L-shaped panel that has the fully ventilated dust panel attached. Mkae sure that your ease the panel off carefully enough not to break those 4 hooks at the top, as these are what align the top panel with the rest of the casing.

Slight side note, but for those that care about dust build up on 24×7 systems like the BeeStation, this can be quite useful to perform cleaning. Anyway, carrying on!

Next up os removing the Hard Drive that the Beestation Personal Cloud arrives with. The first thing you need to remove is the 2 smaller screws located around the edge of the casing. DO NOT REMOVE THE 2 LARGER SCREWS IN THE MIDDLE!!! These larger screws hold the HDD in place and you need to do this much later, or else risk the drive moving around during the dismantling.

Each screw will be easy to remove, however there are actually 3 more screw located around the base of the framework. They are tricky to reach, and a longer screwdriver would be recommended, but it can be done with an ordinary 15cm + screwdriver will get the job done.

At the front base area, you can find two black Phillips/cross-head screws that you need to remove. You will need to come at there from a slight angle if you only have a short screwdriver. Important – DO NOT USE AN ELECTRIC/AUTOMATIC SCREWDRIVER!!! Notwithstanding that you will tear the soft screw to pieces, you might cause vibration that will be damaging to the HDD next to the screw! Do it the OLD SKOOL way!

The last screw is much harder to spot and reach, it is located at the bottom-back of the enclosure, on the NON-Motherboard side. You will need to come at it from a slight angle, even with a longer screwdriver. Note, you COULD have removed the top panel attached to the HDD in order to get to the screw a little easier, but I personally would rather the HDD remains in an immobile cage throughout this part of the Beestaion teardown. It’s your call!

That is the last screw that you need to remove and , once it is done, you can begin the removal of the HDD clip/cage.

The HDD Clip/cage will slide out sideways (with a little resistance). BE CAREFUL with the removal of the HDD cage/clips, as the right-hand side will have the controller board (which has the heatsink on top of the CPU, and a bare PCB – which can be super susceptible to static and moisture!

One you have removed the HDD Cage tray, you will now have three components on the table:

Next, removing the Hard Drive from its plastic handles. The HDD is held in place by 4 screws that go directly into the same four screw holes that are usually used by HDD bays on Diskstastion NAS that utilize trays. Ther are four screw in each corner. Important note for later – Make a note of the clips and direction that are on either side of the HDD – whether you want to reassemble this Beestation to the factory build OR you are considering exploring larger HDDs, getting these clips the wrong way around or in the wrong direction will, at best, mean it won’t for back together and you need to redo them, or at WORST, you end up damaging the controller board and casing as you attempt to re-insert the drive.

Each screw uses a counter-sunk system and also arrives with a rubber washer between the screw head and the plastic. This means that you do not need to fully remove the screw, as there is a small % of space left. Regardless, just remove the four screws and each of the side panels should come off very easily.

Once again, make sure you keep track of which panel goes with each side of the HDD – As this will be a right pain during reassembly. An important area of note here is that IF you are considering adding larger/alternative drives to the Beestation and you have your heart set on an SSD, you are going to need a 2.5″ to 3.5″ HDD adapter, as the screw holes that the tray clips AND the PCB Backboard are not available on a 2.5″ SSD. This does also open the door to the potential for a Dual 2.5″ SATA SSD to 3.5″ SATA Adapter case, which would provide the performance benefits of 2x SATA SSD in a RAID 0, or the redundancy benefits of 2x SATA SSDs in a RAID 1, if the case supports internal RAID 0/1). Here are two options:

2.5″ to 3.5″ SATA Adapter ($7.99+)

Find on Amazon HERE

SYNOLOGY ASSISTANT NOT CONFIGURED PICTURE

Find on Amazon HERE

However, there is considerably more to adding a new hard drive to the BeeStation than just the physical injection!

The one we want to focus on is the HDD tray/cage. Carefully turn it around and lay the drive facedown on the table.

Once the drive is ‘face down’, you need to carefully (yes, THAT word again! Take a drink) remove the two silver screws, Try to touch the blue PCB controller board as little as possible.

Once you have removed those two screws, you need to either slide the controller board away from the Hard drive, or slide the hard drive away. You are doing this to disconnect the SATA connector that is soldered to the controller board. Do NOT leverage the hard drive upwards/downwards, as you run the risk of breaking the connector.

The controller PCB should come away very easily and with little resistance. But before we move forward, it’s worth checking the SATA connector is unharmed.

Place the controller PCB delicately to one side and then get your new storage media drive (your new HDD or SSD) unpacked and ready

Slot the new SATA drive into the PCB via the SATA slot.

Then flip the drive and board over, then screw in the two silver screws to attached the PCB to the HDD. Next, reattached the two tray clips to either side of the new HDD – gain, make sure you select the correct clips for either side and in the correct direction.

Then slot the drive cage back into the base Beestastion black plastic casing. It will be a very specific alignment and you will know it is correct, as the back ports will be completely flush with the rear port cavities on the casing

Screw the 3 base screws in place once again. plus then re-screw the two top placement screws

Then slide back into place the L-shaped top panel. Ensure the 4 hooks at the top slide in neatly and the LED cover at the front/base will meet flush with the other plastic panel.

Re-screw the two silver screws that hold the L-shaped panel in place and then re-attached the rubber foot panel.

Reconnect the local area network/internet connection, as well as the USB drive (if you have a USB backup) and finally the power cable. Then press the power button and now move over to your network connection PC/Mac/Linux desktop and we can start the reinitialization.

Re-Installing BSM on your BeeStation

When the device begins booting, after a few minutes you will hear the system beep. However, instead of heading to the usual Synology Bee Portal site page, you need to open up the Synology Assistant tool. It will scan the local area network and it will find the Synology BeeStation, but it will say that it is in the process of ‘Upgrading’

Now the amount of time this takes will depend on a lot of factors (drive size, download speed if the system is collecting the BSM software online. After some time has passed (10-20 mins tops), the system will reboot ( you will hear the drive spin down and the light on the system will change from a flashing orange light to a slow white light.

1 – UPGRADING

2 – REINITIALIZING

After a few minutes, the synology assistant should now show the message ‘Starting Services’. Don’t forget to click the ‘search’ button at the top left to rescan to see any new changes to the system status.

After a period of time, the system will now show a new message that indicates that the system needs configuration in the synology assistant:

Now you just need to double-click the Beestation listing on the Synology Assistant tool, and it will open up a new tab on your web browser that will guide you through the original BSM installation process, via the Synology Beestation Portal web site:

When you have logged into your Synology Account and have gone through the first 4 steps of the installation, you will be asked if the system is showing an orange light. If it does not, you will need to follow to on-screen restart prompts using the reset button, which will all the system to reboot into ‘find’ mode. Once you have the On-screen serial number prompt and the light on the BeeStation is Solid orange (not flashing) you can go through the usual system setup prompts and connect the BeeStation with your Synology account as normal and log in as you would have before.

What if my Synology BeeStation does not boot into the usual installer?

There IS a chance that your BeeStation will instead display a message saying ‘Not Configured’ upon the first power on after installing your new drive, typically caused by a lack of facility to download the latest firmware (i.e the network connection is not present or restricted on your network). This will result in the system booting into a similar system setup window as found on the Synology Diskstation/DSM devices.

If this occurs, double-click the BeeStation listing on the Synology Assistant tool, and it will open a new tab on your web browser that shows the manual installation steps for BSM on your BeeStation system via the LAN. Just follow the steps on the screen to select the downloaded BSM image you have on your PC/Mac machine, as well as begin the installation to the new HDD/SSD – This will wipe the contents of the drive, but that is normal and you should be using a new/blank drive anyway.

This will install the latest BSM software and the system will restart after 10 mins and you can follow the steps outlined in the previous section to setup the Beestation with your new HDD/SSD for the first time.

How to Restore Your Data to the Upgraded Drive BeeStation?

Now that your BeeStation is up and running, with your new HDD/SSD, you might have a backup of your data on USB or on the Cloud that you want to restore. If you want to use the BeeFiles Backup services for USB/Cloud, you can do this easily with the options in the BeeFiles tool and your cloud sync or USB that you created earlier can be re-connected and the data will be sent back to the Beestation. However, if you have opted to do the system-wide backup in the System settings menu, you will need to head in the system config page and select the Restore Tab on the left hand side of the page:

Next, select the Restore option, ensuring that you either have the USB Backup drive you used connected to the BeeStation system, or you have established a connection with your appropriate Synology C2 account.

Next, you need to go through the list of Backup Images (if you have multiple) and select the appropriate system backup image you want Then you need to select the backup and proceed with restoring this system image

It is worth noting that this process can take a great deal of time (depending on the size of the backup, whether it is cloud/local based and the filled % of the capacity that back was of the original 4TB drive. In my tests, it took 35 mins to restore the system that had 300-400GB of data – it is a slow by methodical process.

Once that is done, the system will reboot and when it has finished, you will need to re-enter and connect your Synology Account. After you log back into the system, you can go into the system setting and BeeFiles again, and you will see that not only is all the data restored, but also that the Synology BSM software has resized the partition to ensure that you are not losing any of the extra space that is available on your new possibly larger HDD (i.e it does not reinstall the 4TB system image, then ignore the extra HDD space – it expands the volume to the full available space of the drive)

And there you go! You have now installed a new HDD or SSD in your Synology BeeStation. REMEMBER, this is NOT authorized by Synology as use for the BeeStation system and will result in the brand not supporting you in the event of issues encountered as a result of installing non-recommended configurations such as this. The Beestation is a simplified cloud alternative to Synology DSM systems. If you want to experiment with more complex configurations, larger storage and faster systems, you should look at the Synology Rackstation and Diskstation systems.


I hope you enjoyed this guide and found in useful/informative! REMEMBER, I did this to show you what the inside of your BeeStation Personal Cloud looks like, so YOU DON’T HAVE TO! If you have any further questions, you can reach out to me on robbie ( at ) nascompares.com, or use our free advice section located on the right hand side of the page. Alternatively, you can reach us on our Discord HERE, our community forum HERE, or for faster and more personal support over on KoFi Commissions HERE. If you use and/or share the content of this guide online, please help us spread awareness of our platform and the work we do by backlinking us appropriately! Thanks for reading!


Synology BeeStation Personal Cloud Review – Quick Conclusion

READ THE FULL BeeStation Review HERE

Synology has clearly done their homework on the development and presentation of the BeeStation private cloud. They are targeting a whole new audience with this system, and therefore, criticisms based on experiences with their other hardware are likely to fall on deaf ears. The BeeStation is probably one of the best middle grounds I have ever seen between an easy-to-use and exceptionally easy-to-set-up private cloud system, while still managing to provide smooth and seamless features for accessing and sharing your private cloud’s storage securely. Looking at this system with a more network-savvy microscope kind of defeats the point, and I’ve tried to be fair in my assessment. The lack of LAN access by default seems a little odd, and launching the BeeStation series in this single-bay, 4TB-only fashion may be a bit of a marketing misstep, but overall, what you’re seeing here is an effectively priced and scaled private cloud system. It’s a fantastic alternative to third-party clouds and existing simplified NAS systems. With many users keeping an eye on their budgets and tightening costs, Synology, known for its premium position in the market, had a challenge scaling down to this kind of user. However, I have to applaud Synology’s R&D for creating a simple and easy-to-use personal cloud solution that still carries a lot of their charm and great software reputation. It may not be as feature-rich as DSM, but BSM does exactly what it says it will do, and I think the target audience it’s designed for will enjoy the BeeStation a great deal!

SOFTWARE - 7/10
HARDWARE - 8/10
PERFORMANCE - 7/10
PRICE - 10/10
VALUE - 10/10


8.4
PROS
👍🏻User-friendly setup, ideal for beginners or those seeking a simple cloud solution.
👍🏻Secure data handling with encrypted data transmission.
👍🏻Comes with 4TB of storage included, offering good value.
👍🏻Compact and lightweight design, enhancing portability.
👍🏻Quiet operation, suitable for home or office environments.
👍🏻Integrates seamlessly with popular cloud services like Google Drive and OneDrive.
👍🏻Affordable pricing at $199, a cost-effective alternative to third-party cloud services.
👍🏻Supports remote access, allowing data management from anywhere and across client devices/OS
👍🏻Synologys reputation for quality and reliability is still clear on this smaller scale.
👍🏻Several client tools (BeeFiles, BeePhotos and Desktop sync tool) for Windows, Mac, iOS and Android available for tailored access
👍🏻System configuration backup option to USB/C2 (Often absent in budget cloud solutions)
👍🏻AI Photo Recognition in BeePhotos for faces, Objects and geo data scraping + Advanced filter/search
CONS
👎🏻Lacks the extensive app support and customization found in Synology\'s DSM platform.
👎🏻Only available in a single-bay, 4TB configuration at launch, limiting expandability.
👎🏻Single 5400RPM HDD running everything leads to slowdown more than you think!
👎🏻LAN access is disabled by default, which may not suit all users.
👎🏻Designed for a specific user base, may not meet the needs of more advanced users.

Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

DEAL WATCH – Is It On Offer Right Now?


These Offers are Checked Daily

 


📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Synology CC400W Camera Review

Par : Rob Andrews
20 mars 2024 à 15:00

Synology CC400W Camera Review

Remember when Synology was only famous for its NAS? Yeah, me neither. Among all the server brands discussed here at NAS Compares, few have created such a diverse portfolio of home and business solutions, covering a wide array of peripherals and accessories, as Synology has. Although their CCTV and security application, Surveillance Station, has been available on their NAS devices for decades, it’s only in the past few years that we’ve seen the brand introduce their own range of surveillance cameras. The new CC400W is the latest addition to their lineup and, although it might look arguably less enterprise-grade compared to the BC500 and TC500 POE high-protection models, the CC400W doesn’t seem to be a slouch either! Targeting indoor use, this multi-surface deployable camera comes with impressively sleek integration with Synology Surveillance Station, no need for a camera license, industry-approved encryption, and wireless connectivity. Indeed, this was the kind of camera I hoped Synology would release in the first phase of their product series launch. Still, better late than never! Today, we’re going to review the new CC400W surveillance camera from Synology NAS and help you decide whether you can trust it with the security of your data and assets!

NoteVideo Review Available NOW on YouTube HERE

Synology CC400W Camera Review – Quick Conclusion

The Synology CC400W, when viewed in isolation, stands out as a slightly above-average surveillance camera. It may not be at the cutting edge of technology, but it doesn’t aspire to be. Instead, Synology is focusing on expanding its camera lineup to complement its well-established surveillance NAS platform, aiming to offer robust and seamlessly integrated products rather than chasing the latest trends. The commitment to ensuring compatibility with third-party cameras while expanding its own range, including the CC400W, BC500, and TC500, is a smart move. It appeals to users seeking a unified first-party surveillance solution that minimizes compatibility issues and security vulnerabilities. One of the CC400W’s strengths is its honesty about capabilities, a refreshing approach in a market often dominated by overhyped claims. This camera clearly delineates its role in the surveillance setup, highlighting a balanced workload between the camera and the Synology NAS. This straightforward integration is likely to attract users looking for a hassle-free surveillance solution. The camera’s enhanced security features, compliance with US certifications, and the absence of a requirement for a surveillance camera license further contribute to its appeal as a reliable, if not revolutionary, product designed for long-term use.

However, there are aspects of the CC400W that could be improved. Given its exclusive design for use with Synology systems and services, the absence of an included SD card at its price point is a notable oversight. Additionally, a two-year warranty feels somewhat limited, especially considering the camera’s likely deployment in business settings for five to ten years, exclusively within Synology’s ecosystem. Moreover, there seems to be a gap in understanding among users regarding the camera’s object detection capabilities versus object recognition and analysis—a distinction Synology could clarify more effectively. Despite these drawbacks, for those looking to expand their Synology surveillance setup without the complexities of camera licenses, desiring quick setup and integration under a single brand, the CC400W confidently meets these needs.

SOFTWARE - 10/10
HARDWARE - 8/10
PERFORMANCE - 8/10
PRICE - 8/10
VALUE - 8/10


8.4
PROS
👍🏻Fast setup and near seamless integration with Synology NAS hardware
👍🏻The audio in and out is as clear as a whistle No need for a camera license simplifies everything!
👍🏻Sturdy and novel mounting base
👍🏻The wireless connectivity was one of the smoothest setups I have experienced in a surveillance camera
👍🏻Dedicated disconnection alerts in conjunction with SD card Edge recording works seamlessly!
👍🏻Remarkably well built, compact yet sturdy.
👍🏻The AI assisted object recognition (human and vehicle) although not perfect is still well presented and accessible in Surveillance Station
👍🏻Camera firmware updates are managed by the NAS smoothly.
👍🏻Significant certification and encryption standards mean unfettered deployment in US businesses
CONS
👎🏻Surprisingly expensive given the hardware
👎🏻Lack of an SD card, despite it being a Synology branded product with Synology services that take advantage of the SD card, at this price!
👎🏻The two-year warranty seems weirdly short given the context of its deployment. Synology could do better in presenting the difference between their AI object cameras and deep video analysis NVRs, to avoid potential user confusion or disappointment.


Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?



Synology CC400W Camera Review – Presentation

Much like the other cameras in Synology’s lineup, the Synology CC400W arrives in a pleasingly aesthetic external package. Considering that 90% of other surveillance cameras on the market, whether for NVR or DVR systems, tend to arrive in plain, brown packaging with little fanfare, Synology deserves a nod here for their continued effort in the presentation of their solutions. The box sides, adorned with specific information relating to the camera’s specifications and capabilities, represent a step above the usual plain, brown, branded box design afforded to other cameras in the market.

Upon opening the retail package, the camera and accessories are all neatly laid out in individual quadrants. As this is a wireless camera, the range of accessories was always expected to be somewhat limited. Nevertheless, everything is presented very well, and each component bears the Synology branding. It also appears that the majority of the packaging materials are fully recyclable.

Alongside the CC400W itself, the camera comes with a remarkably compact PSU. Designed for exceptionally low power consumption, the diminutive five-watt power adapter reflects this. Furthermore, this adapter connects via a USB Type-C interface, meaning you’re not solely reliant on Synology’s own PSU.

The option to purchase much longer USB Type-C extension cables facilitates greater deployment distance from a power outlet. Additionally, with the right arrangement of five-watt external batteries and solar panels, the feasibility of deploying this camera via solar power is clear, as long as a USB-connected battery point is included in the setup.

While Synology doesn’t directly support this, and the CC400W doesn’t come with its own power bank for USB solar panel support, this does highlight the camera’s low power requirement.

The rest of the accessories are quite standard, including warranty information, first-time setup guidance, details on using the wall bracket and fixings, and instructions for attaching the camera. That’s about it, which is perfectly adequate for this kind of camera.

Anything more could have been unnecessary and potentially wasteful. However, I am a bit disappointed that Synology does not include an SD card of any capacity with these cameras at this price point, given the affordability of SD cards and their utility in Surveillance Station.

Additionally, it seems slightly unfair of Synology to only provide this camera with a 2-year manufacturer’s warranty when their other cameras come with a 3-year warranty. There’s an argument that those cameras were designed for higher outdoor durability and, with POE support in previous releases, they have fewer potential failure points. However, even though the CC400W isn’t exactly a budget camera, for its price point and intended use, it’s surprising that Synology didn’t offer a three-year warranty as they did with other camera releases. Nonetheless, the Surveillance Station software receives effective lifetime support on Synology NAS systems, so there’s no limitation in terms of security updates and feature enhancements.

Overall, the CC400W presents itself as a quite pleasing and well-packaged kit, a cut above many other supported ONVIF cameras used with Surveillance Station, yet not exactly a game-changer. My concerns regarding the lack of an included SD card and the 2-year warranty aside (considering that the majority of budget cameras barely come with a one-year warranty), I’m satisfied with what I find here. Now, let’s focus on the design of the new CC400W camera.

Synology CC400W Camera Review – Design

The Synology CC400W Camera is equipped with a 2.12 mm lens, designed to capture a broad field of view with its 125° horizontal, 72° vertical, and 145° diagonal viewing angles. This wide-angle lens ensures comprehensive coverage of the monitored area, making it ideal for various indoor settings where maximizing the field of view is essential for effective surveillance. The lens’s design aims to provide clear and detailed images across a wide area, enhancing the camera’s utility in security applications.

With an aperture of F2.0, the lens of the Synology CC400W allows for considerable light intake, contributing to the camera’s ability to produce crisp images even in lower light conditions. This feature is particularly beneficial for surveillance in environments with varying lighting, ensuring consistent video quality throughout the day and into the night. The effective aperture supports the camera’s high-resolution HDR video capability, enabling it to capture high-quality footage with balanced exposure in scenes with contrasting light and shadow.

The camera’s lens supports night vision capabilities, utilizing high power infrared LED to illuminate up to 10 meters away. This ensures that the Synology CC400W can provide clear video surveillance in complete darkness, extending its monitoring capabilities to 24/7 operation. The lens, in conjunction with the camera’s infrared capabilities, plays a crucial role in achieving effective night vision, making the CC400W a reliable choice for continuous surveillance needs, regardless of the time of day.

The Synology CC400W Camera not only records live audio as part of its surveillance footage but also allows for the output of custom alarms or direct voice communications through Synology Surveillance Station client services as needed. This functionality is enhanced by an audio sensor that can notify the surveillance setup of noise levels, which can be set permanently or according to a schedule, to preemptively warn of potential intruders. These audio detection alerts, along with physical tampering alerts, add valuable features to the camera’s capabilities, requiring a modern camera for smooth operation. Synology has commendably integrated these services into the camera, reducing reliance on the Synology NAS system to handle all the work.

Underneath a rubber panel at the base of the camera lies a reset button and, more importantly, an SD card slot. While SD card slots are not a novel feature in network cameras, their utility with third-party cameras in Synology’s Surveillance Station is notably limited. However, the SD card slot in the Synology CC400W can be fully utilized for edge recording. This means that in the event of a disconnection from the Synology NAS—due to network failure or system compromise—the camera will continue recording and managing alerts locally on the SD card. Once the connection is restored, it will sync the recordings and alerts back to the NAS. This feature, combined with the Synology C2 cloud recording service, ensures comprehensive protection across various failure scenarios and security threats.

The camera’s base hinge features a 360-degree rotating metal arm, allowing for adjustment across three axes. The base itself is magnetic, simplifying the installation process and significantly easing deployment. Despite its ease of installation and low power consumption, it’s essential to remember this camera still requires a power source, necessitating a USB Type-C outlet or the use of the included five-watt USB PSU. The magnetic base is a notably convenient feature, uncommon in surveillance cameras, and the locking mechanism for the aperture/hinges ensures once positioned, the camera remains securely in place.

The Synology CC400W Camera features an IP65 rating, indicating a high level of protection against dust ingress and water jets, although slightly lower than the BC500 and TC500 models. This rating suggests the camera is not designed for exposure to heavy rain or outdoor elements, emphasizing its suitability for indoor or sheltered outdoor use.

In the realm of government surveillance system installations within the United States, professionals are required to navigate with precision to adhere to specific legal requirements, notably under section 889 of the 2019 National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA). This legislation outlines stringent criteria for video surveillance equipment intended for use on U.S. government properties, prohibiting equipment and services from certain companies deemed a national security risk, including Huawei Technologies Company, ZTE Corporation, Hytera Communications Corporation, Hangzhou Hikvision Digital Technology Company, and Dahua Technology Company. This mandate ensures that only compliant products, which do not incorporate components from these restricted entities, are utilized in sensitive government-related surveillance operations. For security professionals and installers, understanding and adhering to these regulations is crucial when selecting equipment for government projects to ensure legal compliance and maintain national security integrity.

Furthermore, the Trade Agreements Act (TAA) complements the NDAA by enforcing standards for products used in government contracts, requiring them to be produced in the United States or other approved countries. The compliance of security products with both NDAA and TAA is a critical factor for businesses and contractors engaged in federal government projects, signifying that the equipment does not contain components from restricted companies and adheres to trade regulations. The Synology CC400W, with its NDAA and TAA certification, stands as a prime example of a compliant surveillance camera suitable for use in government-related installations. This certification not only ensures adherence to U.S. laws but also positions the CC400W as a viable option for security professionals seeking to fulfill government contracts with confidence in the legality and security of their surveillance technology choices. So, unsurprisingly, the camera’s benefits of NDAA and TAA certification, make it a compliant choice for businesses, especially those dealing with U.S. government contracts. These certifications are crucial in the wake of security concerns and trade disputes, as they ensure the camera meets strict standards required for use in sensitive environments. The CC400W strikes a balance by offering compatibility with Synology’s platform, compliance with important regulatory standards, and moderate affordability for business users.

The design and production quality of the Synology CC400W Camera are commendable. While it’s still a surveillance camera and praise must be relative, it stands out as a compact and easily deployable option for business use. Some might note the absence of an included SD card or a solar panel with an internal battery system as drawbacks, but given its intended use case, these are minor concerns. The focus now shifts to how this camera integrates into your surveillance setup.

Synology CC400W Camera Review – Network Connectivity

The Synology CC400W is tailored specifically for integration with Synology NAS systems, eschewing support for use with third-party NVRs or NAS devices. It boasts wireless network connectivity, supporting dual-band Wi-Fi frequencies of 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz, providing a reliable and sufficient range for camera deployment and the maintenance of stable video streams. While recent trends have introduced Wi-Fi 6 surveillance cameras featuring the 6 GHz band, such enhancements are deemed somewhat superfluous in the surveillance domain, where ensuring ample coverage distance remains the primary objective.

Lacking a physical Ethernet connection, the CC400W might deter users seeking a hybrid deployment approach. However, its integration with Synology software streamlines the setup process. Notably, the camera does not require a Synology surveillance camera license for operation in Surveillance Station, allowing users to conserve the two licenses typically included with most Synology NAS systems. This camera’s compatibility facilitates seamless firmware updates and direct control via the Surveillance Station GUI, simplifying long-term management and maintenance compared to third-party camera solutions.

Deployment of the CC400W requires it to reside within the same local area network as the Synology NAS it is configured to record to. This setup may necessitate adjustments to existing VLAN configurations, especially in environments with scattered wireless access points. The absence of a wired connection option could pose challenges for some setups. Configuration is streamlined through the DS cam mobile app for Android and iOS, which automatically detects the camera within the local network, eliminating the need for manual setup. This ease of integration underscores the camera’s designed compatibility with Synology’s ecosystem, offering a hassle-free addition to existing surveillance systems.

During practical evaluation, the CC400W’s performance was tested using a $10, 10-meter USB-C extension cable to extend power delivery distance, demonstrating the camera’s low power requirements and flexible deployment potential. The camera maintained high-quality video transmission even when placed 8 meters away from the nearest wireless access point, ensuring desired bitrate and framerate consistency. The ability to integrate and manage live feeds, archival footage, and AI-driven alerts within Surveillance Station’s monitoring center highlights the CC400W’s seamless operation and contribution to comprehensive surveillance setups, emphasizing its role within Synology’s networked ecosystem.

Synology CC400W Camera Review – Surveillance Station Software Support

Reviewing the Synology CC400W camera without addressing the Synology Surveillance Station software would be incomplete. This camera essentially relies on a Synology NAS and its integrated surveillance software to function. It’s no exaggeration to say that for many, the Surveillance Station software—bundled with every Synology NAS, regardless of size—justifies the entire cost of the system. Offering an enterprise-grade surveillance platform that is both user-friendly and rich in features, Surveillance Station has evolved from a niche add-on to one of Synology’s primary selling points. The software’s accessibility, client support, security, and comprehensive feature set make it a standout, regardless of whether it’s paired with a Synology CC400W camera or a third-party option. To delve into a detailed review of Surveillance Station would significantly extend the length of this article. Fortunately, a comprehensive review of Synology Surveillance Station 9.1 has been previously conducted, available below, a full review on YouTube. This review covers the wide array of features and benefits offered by this surveillance software when used in conjunction with a Synology camera. The Synology CC400W camera is specifically engineered to provide optimal performance with Synology Surveillance Station, the current version being 9.1.1. The camera’s integration with Surveillance Station offers advanced functionality that outshines the features provided by third-party and non-edge-AI-recognition cameras.

The CC400W camera, when paired with Surveillance Station, supports a plethora of services that transform your security experience. It provides access to live camera feed (monitoring center), which can be scaled to accommodate several cameras on screen simultaneously. You can also view live feeds and previous recordings side-by-side on the software.

Additionally, the Surveillance Station allows for privacy mask and watermark applications on the feed.

It also supports the upload of eMaps and integrates with third-party mapping services like Google Maps and OpenMaps.

Surveillance Station isn’t limited to camera support. It also provides control for IP speakers, door controls, and I/O supported peripherals. Users can access the system swiftly and intuitively via a mobile app, and even use their mobile as another surveillance camera feed with Synology Live Cam. Alerts and push notifications can be scheduled for specific events, and the system generates downloadable analytical reports.

The Surveillance Station further extends its functionality with an array of additional add-ons. These range from YouTube Live Streaming and video integrity tools to transaction checking and IFTTT/Webhook services.

It also offers features like motion detection, missing object detection, idle zone monitoring, and foreign object area tagging. Access to the Surveillance Station is conveniently provided through web browsers, desktop clients, and mobile clients, either over the local network or remotely.

One of the key features is the Smart Lapse creation, which lets you truncate long periods of recording into speedy sequences. For example, you can turn a full day’s footage into a few minutes for quick scanning. It also supports cloud recording with Synology C2 Surveillance (available with a free trial, then on a subscription basis).

The Surveillance Station also offers a Home Mode, which allows automated camera schedules to kick in when a defined user exits or enters the premises using WiFi links. More details on these features can be found in our review of Synology Surveillance Station 9.1 on our YouTube channel:

The CC400W camera, paired with Surveillance Station, supports sophisticated AI detection techniques like people detection, vehicle detection, intrusion detection, crowd detection, and loitering detection. It also offers a Smart Search feature that lets you search a predefined area of a recorded feed for specific incidents.

Vehicle Detection – Similar to its capability for human detection, the CC400W camera extends its intelligent recognition to vehicles as well. This feature proves particularly useful in situations when the premises are closed, and an unexpected vehicle enters the vicinity. The surveillance system can be programmed to provide ‘out of hours’ alerts, notifying owners whenever vehicles approach their premises during closed or off hours. It’s an excellent way to ensure the security of your property when you’re not physically present.

Intrusion Detection – The CC400W camera takes intrusion detection a notch higher with its advanced features. Users can draw lines on the feed that can have multiple bend or break points, marking out specific areas as off-limits. This allows the system to monitor if people or vehicles cross into these forbidden zones. Thanks to edge AI recognition, you can customize this feature to fit your needs—for example, allowing an area to be entered by people but not vehicles or vice versa. This level of customization helps create ‘no go’ zones at specific times, further enhancing the security of your premises.

Crowd Detection – The CC400W camera’s recognition capabilities extend beyond just humans and vehicles. It also offers nuanced crowd detection. For instance, the system could be programmed to ignore one or two people in a predefined area. However, if that number increases to five or six, it could trigger an alert. This crowd detection feature enables you to set thresholds for alerts based on the number of people in a particular area, ensuring you’re notified only when necessary.

Loitering Detection – Similar to crowd detection, loitering detection is another impressive feature of the CC400W camera. This function enables the camera to alert you when an individual or vehicle remains within a predefined area for an unusually long period. People just passing by won’t trigger an alert, but if they loiter around for a while, the system will notify you. This helps you keep an eye on any potential suspicious activity around your premises.

Smart Search – This feature significantly enhances the surveillance process by allowing you to focus on a specific area within recorded feeds. For instance, you can set the system to alert you of any movement, person, or vehicle in a predetermined spot, such as a door, desk, or window. By combining Smart Search with Smart Time Lapse, you can sift through weeks of recordings in a fraction of the time, automatically identifying any noteworthy events in a particular spot. It allows you to retroactively apply advanced surveillance parameters, even if they weren’t set up at the time of recording.

While the CC400W camera is impressive, it’s important to note that it does not support database storage. It cannot store a reference of specific people or faces and vehicle registrations for future comparison when they appear in the feed, allowing alerts to be scaled accordingly. To access this kind of functionality, a DVA system such as the Synology DVA1622 2-Bay or DVA3221 4 Bay is necessary. Similarly, the CC400W camera cannot keep numerical track of the number of people or objects crossing the set intrusion lines, making it impossible to maintain an accurate count—for instance, knowing who is in or out during a fire alarm. Thus, while the CC400W camera provides a range of advanced features, it has its limitations.

Recordings are sent via HTTPS/SRTP encryption to the NAS, are encrypted when recorded to the local memory card, and remain encrypted when backed up on the Surveillance C2 cloud service. Furthermore, the previously mentioned Synology CC400W camera is NDAA and TAA compliant, which gives it a distinct edge over lower-priced Chinese cameras. In conclusion, while the CC400W Camera does not match up to more expensive Deep Video Analysis systems like the DVA162/DVA3221, its exclusive features and exemption from surveillance licenses make it a compelling choice.

Surveillance Station boasts a vast array of features and services, many of which are either managed by the system itself or utilized in collaboration with the security camera. The integration of AI services with the CC400W camera opens up additional possibilities, although these are somewhat limited when compared to the capabilities unlocked with Synology’s DVA (Deep Video Analysis) NAS units. The CC400W can recognize humans and vehicles, create paths and exclusion zones, and assist in AI-driven searches to accelerate archive retrievals. However, lacking an onboard AI database means it cannot perform more complex AI tasks that require immediate access to an extensive, regularly updated system database—such as people counting, license plate recognition, and facial recognition. These advanced functionalities necessitate a DVA NAS and are crucial to consider when setting up a surveillance system aimed at recognition or identification, as these tasks require different system resources and camera capabilities.

What IS and ISN’T Possible with the Synology Camera AI-Assisted Services?

Now, despite the Synology CC400W, BC500 and TC500 Surveillance Cameras arriving with onboard hardware for AI-powered recognition tasks, it is worth highlighting that using them is NOT the same as using the Deep Video Analysis (DVA) series of NAS servers in Synology’s portfolio. These operations are managed from inside the camera and the alerts are handled and actioned by the NAS after the camera sends the appropriate alert – and these cameras so NOT have the same level of hardware as the DVA1622 and DVA3221 inside each of them! Additionally, whereas the DVA series manages multiple tasks internally from multiple cameras, only using the camera hardware as a life ‘feed’, these cameras cannot run deeper AI tasks that involve counting, internal database management and keeping records of AI referral data internally – they do not have the storage or processing power for that. So more complex people counting and specific facial recognition will not be immediately available to your PLUS series Diskstation, just because you are using the BC500, CC400W and/or TC500. Here is a breakdown of the services available to users with either Synology Cameras or a Synology DVA NAS:

AI Service Case Use BC500 & TC500 DVA1622 & DVA3221
People / Vehicle/Loitering Detection Reduce false alarm and protect against loitering YES YES
Crowd Detection Monitor public safety or quality of service YES YES
Intrusion Detection Protect perimeter and restricted area YES YES
Instant Search Investigate incidents quickly after they happen YES NO
People/Vehicle Counting Calculate occupancy in shops, food courts, or parking lots with aggregated counting of people and vehicles entering and leaving NO YES
Face Recognition Automate personnel identification and prevent unauthorized access NO YES
License Plate Recognition Identify license plates and set up triggers based on configurable allow or block lists NO YES

If you are unaware of the Synology Deep Video Analysis NAS system, you can find out more about it in the video reviews of the hardware and software below from our YouTube channel:

Synology CC400W Camera Review – Conclusion

The Synology CC400W, when viewed in isolation, stands out as a slightly above-average surveillance camera. It may not be at the cutting edge of technology, but it doesn’t aspire to be. Instead, Synology is focusing on expanding its camera lineup to complement its well-established surveillance NAS platform, aiming to offer robust and seamlessly integrated products rather than chasing the latest trends. The commitment to ensuring compatibility with third-party cameras while expanding its own range, including the CC400W, BC500, and TC500, is a smart move. It appeals to users seeking a unified first-party surveillance solution that minimizes compatibility issues and security vulnerabilities.

One of the CC400W’s strengths is its honesty about capabilities, a refreshing approach in a market often dominated by overhyped claims. This camera clearly delineates its role in the surveillance setup, highlighting a balanced workload between the camera and the Synology NAS. This straightforward integration is likely to attract users looking for a hassle-free surveillance solution. The camera’s enhanced security features, compliance with US certifications, and the absence of a requirement for a surveillance camera license further contribute to its appeal as a reliable, if not revolutionary, product designed for long-term use.

However, there are aspects of the CC400W that could be improved. Given its exclusive design for use with Synology systems and services, the absence of an included SD card at its price point is a notable oversight. Additionally, a two-year warranty feels somewhat limited, especially considering the camera’s likely deployment in business settings for five to ten years, exclusively within Synology’s ecosystem. Moreover, there seems to be a gap in understanding among users regarding the camera’s object detection capabilities versus object recognition and analysis—a distinction Synology could clarify more effectively. Despite these drawbacks, for those looking to expand their Synology surveillance setup without the complexities of camera licenses, desiring quick setup and integration under a single brand, the CC400W confidently meets these needs.

Synology CC400W PROS Synology CC400W CONS
  • Fast setup and near seamless integration with Synology NAS hardware
  • The audio in and out is as clear as a whistle No need for a camera license simplifies everything!
  • Sturdy and novel mounting base
  • The wireless connectivity was one of the smoothest setups I have experienced in a surveillance camera
  • Dedicated disconnection alerts in conjunction with SD card Edge recording works seamlessly!
  • Remarkably well built, compact yet sturdy.
  • The AI assisted object recognition (human and vehicle) although not perfect is still well presented and accessible in Surveillance Station
  • Camera firmware updates are managed by the NAS smoothly.
  • Significant certification and encryption standards mean unfettered deployment in US businesses
  • Surprisingly expensive given the hardware
  • Lack of an SD card, despite it being a Synology branded product with Synology services that take advantage of the SD card, at this price!
  • The two-year warranty seems weirdly short given the context of its deployment. Synology could do better in presenting the difference between their AI object cameras and deep video analysis NVRs, to avoid potential user confusion or disappointment.

 

If you are thinking of buying a Synology NAS, please use the links below as it results in us at NASCompares receiving an affiliate fee from Amazon:

Need More Help Choosing the Right NAS?

Choosing the right data storage solution for your needs can be very intimidating and it’s never too late to ask for help. With options ranging from NAS to DAS, Thunderbolt to SAS and connecting everything up so you can access all your lovely data at the touch of a button can be a lot simpler than you think. If you want some tips, guidance or help with everything from compatibility to suitability of a solution for you, why not drop me a message below and I will get back to you as soon as possible with what you should go for, its suitability and the best place to get it. This service is designed without profit in mind and in order to help you with your data storage needs, so I will try to answer your questions as soon as possible.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

 

UGREEN NASync DXP4800 PLUS NAS Review

Par : Rob Andrews
22 mars 2024 à 15:00

UGREEN NASync DXP4800 PLUS Review (Pre-Release)

With many newcomers stepping into the network-attached storage arena, aiming to compete with established giants like Synology and QNAP, UGREEN’s entry is one of the most confident I’ve seen to date. UGREEN, a brand that has existed for quite some time in the computer accessories arena, seems to have a head start over other brands trying to enter the private consumer cloud and entry-level business market. The NASync series, also known as the DXP series, features an unusually large number of SKUs at launch, offering seven different configurations of storage capacity, internal hardware, and external connectivity. In a somewhat unconventional move, the brand has opted to use the crowdfunding site Kickstarter to launch its new product range. Although crowdfunding for NAS solutions was once rare, by 2024, several mid to high-profile crowdfunded NAS solutions have emerged with varying degrees of success. Predominantly East Asian-based brands often utilize Kickstarter to introduce their products to a Western audience, and UGREEN is doubling down on this strategy. Today, we’re examining the DXP4800 Plus, a 4-bay prosumer solution aiming to change expectations for server value. It boasts high-demand features like a powerful Intel CPU, DDR5 memory, Gen SSD storage, 10GbE, and flexible OS usage. There’s a lot to like here, but is this brand’s first foray into NAS storage worth your investment? And should Synology and QNAP be concerned?

Important – The UGREEN DXP4800 Plus NAS is still in the early stages of crowdfunding. The unit provided for review by UGREEN might not represent the finished product if/when crowdfunding is concluded and eventual fulfillment begins. UGREEN is an already long-established and trusted brand, but nevertheless, it is important to keep in mind that this is still a product that is initially being made available via crowdfunding and therefore an element of additional care is always advised, compared with a comparable product purchased via traditional retail outlets.

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Quick Conclusion

BOTTOM LINE – The UGREEN NASYnc DXP4800 Plus does not feel ‘finished’ yet and still needs more time in the over, but UGREEN have been very clear with me that this product is not intended for release and fulfilment till summer 2024 and improvements, optimization and product completion is still in progress. Judging the UGREEN NAS systems, when what we have is a pre-release and pre-crowdfunding sample, was always going to be tough. The DXP4800 PLUS is a very well put-together NAS solution, arriving with a fantastic launching price point (arguably even at its RRP for the hardware on offer). UGREEN has clearly made efforts here to carve out their own style, adding their own aesthetic to the traditional 4-bay server box design that plagues NAS boxes at this scale. Equally, although they are not the first brand to consider Kickstarter/Crowdfunding for launching a new product in the NAS/personal-cloud sector, this is easily one of the most confident entries I have seen yet. The fact that this system arrives on the market primarily as a crowdfunded solution (though almost certainly, if successful, will roll out at traditional retail) is definitely going to give users some pause for thought. Equally, the UGREEN NAS software, still in beta at the time of writing, although very responsive and nailing down the basics, still feels like it needs more work to compete with the bigger boys at Synology and QNAP. Hardware architecture, scalability, and performance are all pretty impressive, though the performance of the Gen 4×4 M.2 NVMe slots didn’t seem to hit the numbers I was expecting. Perhaps a question of PCIe bottlenecking internally, or a need for further tweaking and optimization as the system continues development. Bottom line, with expected software updates to roll out closer to launch and fulfillment, such as an expanded App center and mobile client, the UGREEN DXP4800 Plus is definitely a device worth keeping an eye on in the growing Turnkey and semi-DIY NAS market. As an alternative to public cloud services, this is a no-brainer and worth the entry price point. As an alternative to established Turnkey NAS Solutions, we will hold off judgment till it is publicly released.

SOFTWARE - 6/10
HARDWARE - 9/10
PERFORMANCE - 6/10
PRICE - 9/10
VALUE - 8/10


7.6
PROS
👍🏻Exceptional Hardware for the Price
👍🏻4 HDDs + 2x Gen 4x4 M.2 in 1 box under $400
👍🏻Good Balanced CPU choice in the Pentium Gold 8505
👍🏻10GbE and 2.5GbE as standard
👍🏻An SD Card Slot (wielrd rare!)
👍🏻10/10 Build Quality
👍🏻Great Scalability
👍🏻Fantastic Mobile Application (even vs Synology and QNAP etc)
👍🏻Desktop/Browser GUI shows promise
👍🏻Established Brand entering the NAS Market
👍🏻Not too noisy (comparatively)
👍🏻Very Appealing retail package+accessories
CONS
👎🏻10GbE Performance was underwhelming
👎🏻Crowdfunding choice is confusing
👎🏻Software (still in Beta) is still far from ready 22/3/24
👎🏻non-UGREEN PSU is unexpected
👎🏻

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Presentation

You really do have to hand it to UGREEN. The presentation of the DXP4800 Plus is genuinely top-tier. This brand’s experience in computer accessories has clearly influenced the presentation of their NAS system, opting for glossy retail packaging that boldly showcases the system’s capabilities over a standard dull brown box.

Inside the shiny box is a well-organized shipping container, with the system secured by rigid foam and an accessory kit containing everything needed to get started. As previously mentioned, retail packaging and device protection during transit are often overlooked by brands, risking damage. Despite being largely unpopulated, except for an internal 2242 SSD for the OS, minimizing the risk of damage, the extra effort on protection is appreciated.

The DXP4800 Plus includes nearly everything needed for setup, aside from hard drives. Given the early stage of the system’s crowdfunding campaign, additional storage options may later become available. The included kit, while basic, ensures users new to hosting their own servers have everything required.

It’s the attention to detail that impresses – from M.2 NVMe heat pads of notable quality and thickness for thermal dissipation, to the included Cat 7 network cables with high-quality gold/copper ends, differentiating them from standard cables.

Even the instruction manual, a rarity as most NAS brands now direct users online, stands out with its glossy presentation and offers more than basic setup guidance.

However, the choice of an external power supply (PSU) was unexpected, given UGREEN’s reputation for high-quality power adapters and cables. While not a deal-breaker, it’s curious to see a non-branded external PSU used, especially when the DXP480t model reviewed elsewhere came with a branded UGREEN PSU. This inconsistency in their approach to PSUs is puzzling.

Overall, the presentation of the DXP4800 Plus from UGREEN, a newcomer to the NAS market intending to launch via Kickstarter, is exceptionally well done. Despite some accessory quality inconsistencies, the overall package is commendable for a pre-release sample. Now, let’s proceed to discuss the system’s design.

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Design

At first glance, the DXP 4800 Plus appears to be a fairly standard four-disk NAS enclosure, and you might be forgiven for thinking it’s just reiterating the typical case design prevalent among numerous companies. However, there’s more to its design and efficiency than meets the eye. For starters, the external enclosure is entirely metal, enhancing heat dissipation directly from the base panel housing the M.2 modules. Additionally, UGREEN has infused the design with their unique stylistic choices, evident in the presentation of individual bays and the arrangement and accessibility of various ports and connections.

The inclusion of small design flourishes, like the rear removable mesh metallic fan panel that magnetically attaches to the casing, is particularly appreciated. While such a feature is familiar to prosumer PC cases, it’s surprisingly rare in NAS designs – puzzling, given NAS systems’ continuous operation and higher likelihood of accumulating dust and debris. Despite being a relatively minor detail, this fan cover’s presence in UGREEN’s first product impresses me.

Handling individual storage bays, however, presents a mixed reaction. The bold numeric design distinguishes it aesthetically from other NAS brands that often opt for bland, nondescript bays. The tool-less, click-and-load trays that forego the need for a screwdriver for drive installation and the inclusion of individual locking mechanisms (with keys) are commendable features.

Yet, these trays feel somewhat flimsy compared to the more robust trays found in desktop solutions from Synology and QNAP. While they secure the hard drives and align with the internal enclosure runners, the internal locking mechanism doesn’t inspire confidence in its security. The trays’ perceived cheap production quality slightly detracts from the overall positive aesthetic. Despite this, the system supports the latest 22TB hard drives, which means daily interaction with these trays will be minimal.

The main storage area features a pre-constructed PCB with four integrated SATA and power connectors. The system documentation indicates that SAS drives are unsupported, a non-issue for this system’s scale and price point.

Upon removing the base’s metallic panel, the two M.2 NVMe SSD bays and upgradable DDR5 SODIMM ports are revealed. Space constraints make heat sink installation challenging, but UGREEN has anticipated this with the inclusion of thick heat pads in the accessory kit, facilitating heat dissipation through the external casing.

UGREEN’s entry into 24/7 service storage with the DXP 4800 Plus is noteworthy, especially for a brand new to this sector. Their effort to differentiate through design and functionality is largely successful, although the storage trays’ quality could be improved. Overall, the system’s design is a strong point, and I look forward to discussing ports and connectivity next.

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Ports and Connections

One of the earliest things to notice about the connectivity on offer on the DXP 4800 Plus NAS is that this system brings back support for SD cards. This may seem almost insane to the average photo and video editor, but SD card readers on NAS devices have been largely absent for almost a decade, despite enormous protestations from photo and video editors for years. Therefore, it’s kind of impressive that UGREEN has opted to provide an SD card slot and a front-mounted USB Type-C connection on the DXP4800 Plus when practically every other brand in the NAS industry does not. It’s going to be a tremendously convenient feature for those wanting to ingest media directly into the system via numerous storage methods and camera systems, making it that much more convenient than many others in the market.

Carrying on the subject of convenience, it’s also worth highlighting that the system not only has a front-mounted USB like the majority of other NAS systems but also arrives with USB Type-C connectivity on the front. This is a surprisingly rare feature in most modern desktop NAS devices, even in 2024.

Flipping the device around, we see that the system has even more USB ports that can be utilized by the system in a host-client relationship. That means that the UGREEN NAS system will act as the host device for connected storage drives and supported peripherals. Unfortunately, this does mean that you cannot directly connect to this device using those USB ports, and the USB 2.0 connections are pretty much exclusively designed for connecting printers and office peripherals, uninterruptible power supplies, or keyboard/mouse in KVM setups alongside the visual output.

The visual output of this system is a 4K 60 frames per second HDMI 2.0 connection. The software for the UGREEN NAS system is still in beta, and currently, the HDMI output is limited to command line access. Currently, there is no graphical user interface afforded to the HDMI output, such as you would find on a QNAP or Asustor NAS system, but as this is a relatively niche feature for many, I’m not going to give them too much of a hard time over this.

Across the rest of the UGREEN NAS range, there is a multitude of different connection profiles and options. In the case of the DXP 4800 Plus, the system arrives with a single 10 gigabit ethernet connection and a single 2.5 gigabit Ethernet connection. Although there is a lack of Thunderbolt connectivity afforded to the more expensive Intel i5 options, the inclusion of these two copper network connections means that not only is there support for failover, but there is also support for link aggregation and port trunking. Given that the system already supports SMB Multi-channel, which can be enabled in the control panel of the UGREEN software, it means in Windows environments, there’s potential for 1.25 GB per second network transmission.The saturation of both of these ports is going to be pretty easy for a four-hard-drive and two NVMe system, and the system does support direct connection from a PC or Mac client directly into the UGREEN system if preferred. However, there is no option for upgrading the system via PCIe cards.

Overall, in terms of ports and connectivity, I’m really happy with everything I found on the DXP 4800 Plus, and although it lacks a bit of scalability in terms of improving upon the network connectivity down the line, what you have at this price point is a fantastic base level of network connectivity, combined with a decent degree of functionality and modern storage expandability to boot. However, all of that connectivity isn’t a great deal if you don’t have much to work with inside, so let’s talk about the internal hardware architecture of the UGREEN NAS.

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Internal Hardware

As mentioned earlier, it’s surprisingly confident of UGREEN to launch so many different NAS devices simultaneously for their first foray into network-attached storage. Not only have they provided several different storage scales and architectures, but they are also supporting three different internal hardware CPUs in terms of CPU. The scale in terms of price and capabilities of each system varies, but they include the Intel N100, Intel Pentium Gold, and Intel 12th Generation i5. The DXP4800 Plus arrived with an Intel Pentium G processor that is a five-core, six-thread architecture (one power core, four efficiency cores).

Though not the first to utilize this CPU in domestic and prosumer NAS, nevertheless, this processor is remarkably underused. Generally, when most brands opt to play it safe with the N100/N300 or immediately scale up towards the i5. It’s surprising because the Pentium Gold processor does a surprisingly good job of balancing a reasonable price point versus a decent degree of hardware resources at your disposal. This is a 20 lane Gen 4 processor that still manages to be more power-efficient than the i5 in bigger models.

Arriving with integrated graphics, supporting up to 64 gigabytes of memory (arriving with 8GB of DDR5 SODIMM and two slots), there is a lot to like here. It is especially surprising when you realize that the brand already provides closely priced N100 and i5 models either side of this device in UGREEN’s NAS portfolio. This processor performs exceedingly well with Plex Media Server and, thanks to those 20 lanes, also means there’s a decent spread of available hardware architecture across the whole device.

The layout of the internal architecture is still yet to be confirmed at the time of writing this review, but digging a little into the backend via SSH revealed that each of the M.2 NVMe slots on the base of this system are Gen 4 x 4. However, how this all separates out on the system chipset and whether these are being delivered into PCIe switches to spread the architecture out for the rest of the system storage, double network connectivity, and dedicating lanes to all those available connections, is definitely an area that leaves pause for thought.

Returning to that base panel, we find that the system arrives with an 8GB DDR5 SODIMM memory module and the capacity to add an additional module when needed. 8GB for this system is pretty decent, but do keep in mind that this system does not support ECC memory. Indeed, none of the UGREEN systems support ECC memory, and although they make a point of highlighting the on-die checks associated with DDR5, most experienced storage enthusiasts tend to prefer traditional ECC memory support. Nevertheless, 8GB is a good amount of memory to start with, and it’s great to know that you are not locked in with presoldered and fixed memory on the board, which is a move often used by more economical brands to save some money and dedicate lanes more efficiently. There see to be two network controllers, one 10GbE controller located under a heatsink:

Which I had difficulty identifying, but I suspect is a Marvell AQtion Aquantia AQC113/AQC114/AQC114CS/AQC115Cs, comprising (from official pages) a high-performance,Scalable mGig, Ethernet MAC+PHY Controllers designed to support the following network rates: 10GBASE-T/5GBASET/ 2.5GBASE-T/1000BASET/100BASE-TX/10BASE-Te. When equipped with a PCI Express Gen 4 x4, this family of Scalable mGig Ethernet MAC+PHY Controllers easily handle the 10 GbE line-rate performance. The AQC113, AQC114, AQC114CS, AQC115C device family combines a mGig Ethernet MAC Controller with a full-reach, low-power, highperformance, multi-gigabit, single-port Gen 4 Ethernet Alaska PHY transceiver into a single, monolithic device that is designed using the latest 14nm, multi-gate, FinFET process technology.

And an additional 2.5GbE Controller (the Intel S2363L51 SRKTU, instead of the usual Intel i226-V 2.5GbE we have observed in a number of Topton/CWWK boards of late) that very little information is available for online:

The USB controller/manager appears to be an ASM1543, (from the ASmedia pages) a one Four to two differential channels mux switch with integrated Type-C Configuration Channel Logic Circuitry, using for USB3.1 type-C mux and CC detection application. The signal performance of mux switch is up to 10Gbps SuperSpeedPlus USB bus with low insertion loss and return loss, and it also supports USB plug orientation, configurable as DFP role or UFP role through the setting of strapping pins, and implementing the strapping for the setting/detection of Type-C current mode, following USB3.1 Revision 1.0 and USB Type-C Connector and Cable Revision 1.3 standard specification.

Next, we find a Richtek RT3624BE, (from the manf pages) a synchronous buck controller which supports 2 output rails and can fully meet Intel IMVP9.1 requirements. The RT3624BE adopts G-NAVPTM (Green Native AVP) which is Richtek’s proprietary topology derived from finite DC gain of EA amplifier with current mode control, making it easy to set the droop to meet all Intel CPU requirements of AVP (Adaptive Voltage Positioning). Based on the G-NAVPTM topology, the RT3624BE features a new generation of quick response mechanism (Adaptive Quick Response, AQR) to optimize AVP performance during load transient and reduce output capacitors. The RT3624BE integrates a high accuracy ADC for platform and function settings, such as ICCMAX, switching frequency, over-current threshold or AQR trigger level.=

In terms of the SATA storage management, I found a ASMedia ASM116 SATA host controller(AHCI). Which is upstream PCIe Gen3 x2 and downstream four SATA Gen3 ports. It’s a low latency, low cost and low power AHCI controller. With four SATA ports and cascaded port multipliers, ASM1164 can enable users to build up various high speed IO systems, including server, high capacity system storage or surveillance platforms.

Finally, we find the two M.2 NVMe slots. Each of these slots supports a 2280 length SSD, which, at launch, can be utilized as a storage pool. As the software, and indeed the system as a whole, is still in early development, features such as caching or even tiered caching appear to be absent at this time. Initially, I was really pleased and impressed that the DXP4800 Plus box arrived with twin NVMe four lanes architecture on each individual slot.

This means that this four-hard-drive system also comes with two super-fast 8000 megabytes per second bandwidth SSD upgrade slots – which is tremendously rare and hugely appealing.

Additionally, digging a bit more into the backend of the system via SSH showed that there had been no downgrade on this speed either! Typically, for reasons of lane allocation, consumption, or heat generation in a system, M.2 slots will often be internally downgraded to a lower performance speed (as is often the case with the likes of Synology and QNAP). There was no sign of this here, and this was a genuine breath of fresh air to see such a high speed and high bandwidth connection afforded to these SSD slots.

Earlier in March when I was testing the (late alpha, early Beta) version of the NAS software, system and services, the performance numbers I got were not hugely encouraging internally. However, there have been numerous improvements on the system software and I am pleased to confirm that the M.2 NVMe slots were indeed 4×4 bandwidth and that some brief 1GB transfer/creation testing showed some early 7GB/s benchmarks on the Gen 4×4 SSD I has inside the system. Now we cannot rule out the impact of caching internally and these tests are NOT reflective of everyday (i.e non synthetic) use, but it was definitely an encouraging sign.

However, when I tried to repeatedly move 1GB of data between each of the NM,2 NVMe, the performance would drop down to 2.4Gb/s, which further suggested some lane sharing and a possible bottleneck by a controller perhaps. Again, this is a beta software/system and UGREEN repeated that this system is still undergoing optimization.

External performance over 10GbE was also an area that I really, REALLY hope this is sees significant optimization. I was hitting a bottleneck of around 500-600MB/s on upload and download (on a 10Gbe / 1,000MB/s connection). The performance numbers below were over 10GbE (with the MTU set at 1500 – As the software is currently not allowing me to scale it to 9000 MTU/Jumbo frames) and for 4x HDDs in a RAID 5, I would be happy with 600MB/s realistically. however…

When I was hitting the SAME numbers when I was accessing a Gen 4×4 M.2 NVMe over 10GbE, I would FULLY expect this to be 999MB/s up and down! Instead, the 10GbE connection, using AJA, on a Seagate Firecuda 530 SSD, was still hitting that bottleneck.

Switching to a Windows transfer test, moving 5GB of data to the m.2 NVMe SSD, over 10GbE saw similar results. My test PC in this case was running on a Gen4x4 SSD, so there was no meaningful storage bottleneck on my PC, and the connection was established via a clear 10GbE connection (via a managed Netgear switch) and using a Sonnet Solo 10G adapter over Thunderbolt.

Further testing confirmed performance dips when transferring data between SSDs, indicating a shared pathway. Despite this being a pre-release sample, and acknowledging potential future optimizations, the observed SSD performance, though still faster than many market alternatives, fell comparatively short of expectations given the hardware capabilities (though still higher than the majority of M.2 SSD performance offered by other brands providing HDD SATA + M.2 solutions right now).

The UGREEN NAS’s software, still in beta, promises further insights into the brand’s direction with their NAS solution and its accompanying software and services, warranting a closer examination as development progresses.

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Software

At the time of writing, the UGREEN NAS software is still in beta, with the mobile application is live now. Reviewing the software included with the DXP4800 Plus—as a final product—feels somewhat premature. The NASsync software beta reveals many baseline functions and long-term plans, detailed in the video below in our initial overview and first impressions of the UGREEN NAS software:

You can read the MASSIVE Software review (covering the Desktop and Mobile experience) HERE on the NASCompares Review Article.

Alternatively, you can watch the video version of the UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review in the video below:

The TL;DR on the UGREEN NAS software (UPDATED)

it’s on track to become a smooth and user-friendly experience, comparable to giants like Synology and QNAP, especially in terms of the web browser experience. Unlike opting for the complexity of TrueNAS or the streamlined, container-focused UI of UnRAID, the UGREEN NAS software is more akin to Synology DSM. The foundation is clearly laid out for expansion in terms of features and tools for the user’s disposal. However, there are notable absences of baseline applications such as container or virtual machine support, and a multi-tiered backup solution within the web GUI (though the UGREEN NAS mobile and desktop clients are in development, expected to preview in March). Basic services for file management, shares, user account control, and an app center—soon to be linked to a repository—are all user-friendly but present some inconsistencies, likely due to its beta status and ongoing development. The physical product may be closer to final development, but the software needs more time for optimization. SMB services were less consistent than desired, and settings changes sometimes didn’t save or recall correctly. This is common for beta software finding its footing, yet it’s important to note that the hardware feels more refined than the software at this stage, months before user delivery. In brief:

What I liked:

  • Intuitive UI with services located logically and responsive controls.
  • The mobile application for iOS and Android is one of the best I have ever used in NAS!
  • Baseline services such as network interface management, user account control, firewall handling, and SSH interface control are all present.
  • A clearly defined app center awaiting connection to an online repository.
  • Helpful tips and guidance are available on most pages, aiding new users.
  • Support for modern services like SMB3 multi-channel and domain services in the beta.
  • Clear account and resource management accessible from the desktop, likely appealing to most users.
  • The inclusion of a remote access relay service and UGREEN account creation from day one, simplifying remote access for new users with built-in firewall and domain tools.
  • UPDATE 5/4/24 – The HDMI output is now full controllable via the mobile application and is intiuative
  • UPDATE 5/4/24 – A Docker application has now been added with access to numerous repository options!
  • UPDATE 5/4/24 – SSH is now disabled by default

What I disliked:

  • Absence of two-factor authentication in the software.
  • Lack of virtualization applications at this stage.
  • Sporadic SMB performance.
  • The Security Advisor tool is only suitable for Antivirus and Anti-Maleware protection, not to scan the system for security weaknesses and advisory actions
  • The HDMI output cannot be used by the desktop/browser user to the same extent as the mobile application + cannot be used by container tools (Plex, Home Automation, etc)
  • In-progress language integration, leading to occasional default displays in Chinese or error messages in Chinese despite English settings.

Improvements needed:

  • Expansion of app integration and desktop client tools for easier system-client bridging.
  • Introduction of a default application for device discovery on the local network, a basic service offered by many NAS brands.
  • More information on UGREEN account and remote access security.

Acknowledging this is a beta, it’s fair to reserve full judgment until the software fully rolls out. As it stands, this beta is promising yet lacks some established NAS software fundamentals. Hopefully, we’ll see significant advancements as the release approaches.

UGREEN DXP4800 Plus NAS Storage Review – Verdict and Conclusion

BOTTOM LINE – The UGREEN NASYnc DXP4800 Plus does not feel ‘finished’ yet and still needs more time in the over, but UGREEN have been very clear with me that this product is not intended for release and fulfilment till summer 2024 and improvements, optimization and product completion is still in progress. Evaluating the UGreen NAS systems, particularly the DXP4800 PLUS, presents a unique set of challenges, given its status as both a pre-release and a pre-crowdfunding sample. This NAS solution stands out not just for its robust construction but also for its exceptional entry price, which seems quite competitive even against its Retail Price Point for the array of hardware it brings to the table. UGreen’s initiative to infuse their extensive experience in computer accessories into a NAS product has resulted in a distinctive aesthetic that sets it apart from the conventional 4-bay server box designs that dominate the market. Their decision to launch through Kickstarter, while not entirely novel in the NAS or personal-cloud arena, signifies one of the most assertive and bold market entries observed to date. The strategy of arriving on the market primarily through crowdfunding will undoubtedly prompt potential users to carefully consider their investment. However, it’s worth noting the significant potential this approach offers for bringing innovative products directly to those who would most benefit from them. The current state of the UGreen NAS software, still in its beta phase, showcases a solid foundation with much promise, despite needing further refinement to stand toe-to-toe with industry giants like Synology and QNAP. The hardware’s scalability and overall performance metrics are commendable, though there’s an observed need for further optimization, particularly concerning the Gen 4×4 M.2 NVMe slots, which didn’t quite meet expected performance benchmarks. This could potentially be attributed to internal PCIe bottlenecking or other factors that may be addressed as the system progresses through its development phase. With the hope of significant software updates and enhancements, such as an expanded App center and a more integrated mobile client, the UGreen DXP4800 Plus is positioned as a noteworthy contender in the burgeoning turnkey and semi-DIY NAS market. Its compelling value proposition as an alternative to mainstream public cloud services, coupled with its attractive pricing, renders it a formidable option for those seeking robust data storage solutions. Yet, in consideration of its potential as an alternative to more established turnkey NAS solutions, a final verdict is reserved until the product’s full public release. The expectation is that, with continued development and user feedback, the UGreen DXP4800 Plus will not only refine its offerings but also significantly influence user expectations and standards within the NAS market.

PROS of the UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NAS CONS of the UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NAS
Exceptional Hardware for the Price
4 HDDs + 2x Gen 4×4 M.2 in 1 box under $400
Good Balanced CPU choice in the Pentium Gold 8505
10GbE and 2.5GbE as standard
An SD Card Slot (wielrd rare!)
10/10 Build Quality
Great Scalability
Fantastic Mobile Application (even vs Synology and QNAP etc)
Desktop/Browser GUI shows promise
Established Brand entering the NAS Market
Not too noisy (comparatively)
Very Appealing retail package+accessories
10GbE Performance was underwhelming
Crowdfunding choice is confusing
Software (still in Beta) is still far from ready 22/3/24
non-UGREEN PSU is unexpected

Click the Link Below to find out more about the UGREEN NASync NAS Series on the brand’s official Site:

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 
❌
❌